Carrier 30RAP010-060 User Manual 2

30RAP010-060

AQUASNAP® Air-Cooled Chillers

with COMFORTLINK™ Controls

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Conventions Used in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Board Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Carrier Comfort Network

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

• COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT)

• DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT)

• REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

• MINUTES LEFT FOR START

• MINUTES OFF TIME

• LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION

• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Operation of Machine Based on Control Method

and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings. . . . . . . . .32

Cooling Set Point Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Low Sound Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package. . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . . 36

Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

• DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled)

• EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT

(4 to 20 mA Controlled)

• DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

• DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION

• DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45

®

(CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . . 19

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46

Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Check Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

• TEMPERATURES

• LOW AMBIENT OPERATION

• VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-63

Page

Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

• CONTROL COMPONENTS

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

• FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

• VALVE REPLACEMENT

• VALVE REASSEMBLY

Compressor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
REPLACEMENT

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
CLEANING

Oil Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)
Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

•FILTER DRIER

• MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR

• MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

• PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES

Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

• HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH

• PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

• COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

• HEATER CABLE

• WINTER SHUTDOWN

Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chilled Water Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Motormaster

• GENERAL OPERATION

• CONFIGURATION

• DRIVE PROGRAMMING

•EPM CHIP

• LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS

• REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES

Hydronic Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64

Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)
Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-73

®

V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

CONTENTS (cont)

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

• GENERAL POWER FAILURE

• UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS
OFF

• CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN

• OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

• COOLING LOAD SATISFIED

• THERMISTOR FAILURE

• LOW SATURATED SUCTION

• COMPRESSOR SAFETIES

Alarms and Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-89

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-100

APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR

PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET

COMMUNICATONS WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102-109

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY

AND LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-113

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID

CHILLER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1 to CL-10

Page

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing
this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is
no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the
refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required
when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that
may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil
to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out
components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recom­mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic
modules or electrical components.

CAUTION

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be

hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and
equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical
rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service
mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment.

When working on this equipment, observe precautions in

the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the
equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow
all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use
care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in
handling all electrical components.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during installation. There
may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon­nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work
is completed.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.
Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in
accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE
(American National Standards Institute/American Society
of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers)
15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The
accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can
displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate
ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of
high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause
heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can
be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount
of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and
skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run
fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing
refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler
fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat
exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting
piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures
below 32 F (0 °C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are
factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power
from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without
taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger
and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect
the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may
void warranty.

CAUTION

Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require
specific rotation. Test condenser fan(s) first to ensure
proper phasing. Swap any two incoming power leads to
correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other
motors.

CAUTION

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss
of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

CAUTION

Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher
pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 ser­vice equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equip­ment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron
refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may
result.

2

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

Run Status

Service Test

Temperature

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

Alarm Status

ENTER

MODE

ESCAPE

Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

GENERAL

This publication contains Controls, Start-Up, Operation,
Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 30RAP
AquaSnap

®

air-cooled chillers. See Table 1. These chillers are
equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expan­sion valves (EXVs).

WARNING

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or
bypass components or otherwise depart from recom­mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control
board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or
electrical component.

Table 1 — Unit Sizes

UNIT NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS)
30RAP010 10
30RAP015 14
30RAP018 16
30RAP020 19
30RAP025 24
30RAP030 28
30RAP035 34
30RAP040 39
30RAP045 43
30RAP050 48
30RAP055 53
30RAP060 56

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the
local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)
will be used in this manual.

Point names will be written with the mode name first, then
any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an
arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold
and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,
which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,
would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through
the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user
would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the

and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name repre­sents pressing to move into the next level of the
menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be
shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the
value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will
be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,
ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads).

Pressing the and keys simultaneously
will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or
value across the display. The expanded description is shown in
the local display tables but will not be shown with the path
names in text.

®

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) point names are also
referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the
unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN
tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Controls Usage

SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling mar­quee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink

Control System for 30RAP units. The display has up and down
arrow keys, an key, and an key. These
keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the
display structure. Press the key until the highest
operating level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode
levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See
Fig. 1 and Tables 2-14.

Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the
and keys simultaneously will put the scrolling
marquee display into expanded text mode where the full mean­ing of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed
for the current selection. Press the and
keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu
of rotating display items (those items in Run Status
In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be
entered again before changes can be made to password protect­ed items. Press the key to exit out of the expanded
text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration
DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display
expansions will immediately change to the new language. No
power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring
languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name alternates
with the value. Press the key at a changeable item
and the value will be displayed. Press again and the
value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be
changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value,
and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in
the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
change the value or state and press the key to accept
it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of
structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass­word protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate
on the display when required. The default password is 0111.
Press and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press

again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the
arrow keys to change the number and press to accept
the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.
The password can only be changed through CCN operator in-

®

terface software such as ComfortWORKS

, ComfortVIEW™

and Service Tool.

See Tables 2-14 and Appendix A for further details.

3



VIEW).



ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module

The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the
ComfortLink™ control system, which is only available as a
field-installed accessory. The display has up and down arrow
keys, an key, and an key. These keys are
used to navigate through the different levels of the display
structure. Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’
is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated
by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2.

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-

rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the Nav­igator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning
of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Press­ing the and keys when the display says
‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator
module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items



in Run Status

VIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-

abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be
made to password protected items. Press the key to
exit out of the expanded text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration



DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display
expansions will immediately change to the new language. No
power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring
languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the
left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the
display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the
display. Press the key at a changeable item and the val­ue will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change
the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in
the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
change the value or state and press the key to accept
it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of
structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass­word protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed
when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default
password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number
and press to enter the digit. Continue with the re­maining digits of the password. The password can only be
changed through CCN operator interface software such as
ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

Adjusting the Contrast

— The contrast of the display can be

adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of

the Navigator module, press the key until the dis­play reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move
to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to
this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF
METR OFF
LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up
or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing
will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view
screen. Pressing and simultaneously
allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or
down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will
change with the adjustment. Press to accept the
change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as
it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness

— The backlight of the
display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory
default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the
Navigator module, press the key until the display
reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the
Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this
mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF
METR OFF
LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the
view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultane­ously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the
up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will
keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

ComfortLink

MODE

Alarm Status

Run Status

Service Test

Temperatures

Pressure

s

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

ESC

Operating Modes

Alarms

ENTER

4

Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*

MODE

SUB-MODE

RUN

STATUS

Auto

View of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Unit Run

Hour and

Start

(RUN)

Compressor

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Preventive

Maintenance

(PM)

Software

Ver si on
(VERS)

LEGEND
Ckt — Circuit
*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be

described in the following format:
Item Expansion (Mode Name
For example, using the language selection item:
Language Selection (Configuration

SERVICE

TEST

Service

Te s t M o d e

(TEST)

Outputs

and Pumps

(OUTS)

Ciruit A Comp

Te st

(CMPA)

Ciruit B Comp

Test

(CMPB)



TEMPERATURES PRESSURES

Ent and Leave Unit

Temperatures

Temperatures

Sub-mode NameITEM)



DISPLANG)

Te mp s
(UNIT)

Ckt A

(CIR.A)

Ckt B

(CIR.B)

Pressures

Ckt A

(PRC.A)

Pressures

Ckt B

(PRC.B)

SET

POINTS

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL)

Head

Pressure

Setpoint

(HEAD)

Brine

Freeze

Setpoint

(FRZ)

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

Circuit
Inputs

(CRCT)

4-20mA

Inputs
(4-20)

General
Outputs

(GEN.O)

Outputs

Circuit A

EXV

(A.EXV)
Outputs

Circuit B

EXV

(B.EXV)

Outputs

Circuit A

(CIR.A)

Outputs

Circuit B

(CIR.B)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Unit Options 1

Hardware

(OPT1)

Unit Options 2

Controls

(OPT2)

CCN Network
Configuration

(CCN)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.A)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.B)

Cir. A EXV

Configuration

(EXV.A)

Cir. B EXV

Configuration

(EXV.B)

Motormaster

Configuration

(MM)

Reset Cool Temp

(RSET)

Set Point and

Ramp Load

(SLCT)
Service

Configuration

(SERV)

Broadcast

Configuration

(BCST)

TIME

CLOCK

Time of

Day

(TIME)

Month,

Date, Day,

and Year

(DATE)

Daylight
Savings

Time

(DST)

Local

Holiday

Schedules

(HOL.L)

Local
Occu­pancy

Schedule

(SCH.L)

Schedule

Override

(OVR)

OPERATING

MODES

Modes

(MODE)

ALARMS

Current
(CRNT)

Reset

Alarms

(RCRN)

Alarm

History

(HIST)

5

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

VIEW EWT XXX.X F ENTERING FLUID TEMP

LWT XXX.X F LEAVING FLUID TEMP

SETP XXX.X F ACTIVE SETPOINT

CTPT XXX.X F CONTROL POINT

LOD.F XXX LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR

STAT X CONTROL MODE 0 = Service Test

LD.PM LEAD PUMP

OCC YES/NO OCCUPIED

LS.AC YES/NO LOW SOUND ACTIVE

MODE YES/NO OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT

CAP XXX % PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

STGE X REQUESTED STAGE

ALRM XXX CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS

TIME XX.XX TIME OF DAY 00.00-23.59

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

1 = Off Local

2 = Off CCN

3 = Off Time

4 = Off Emrgcy

5 = On Local

6 = On CCN

7 = On Time

8 = Ht Enabled

9 = Pump Delay

MNTH XX MONTH OF YEAR 1 = January, 2 = February, etc.

DATE XX DAY OF MONTH 01-31

YEAR XX YEAR OF CENTURY

RUN HRS.U XXXX HRS MACHINE OPERATING HOURS

STR.U XXXX MACHINE STARTS

HR.P1 XXXX.X PUMP 1 RUN HOURS

HR.P2 XXXX.X PUMP 2 RUN HOURS

HOUR HRS.A XXXX HRS CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS

HRS.B XXXX HRS CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS See Note

HR.A1 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS

HR.A2 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS

HR.B1 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS See Note

HR.B2 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS See Note

STRT ST.A1 XXXX COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS

ST.A2 XXXX COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS

ST.B1 XXXX COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS See Note

ST.B2 XXXX COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS See Note

PM PUMP PUMP MAINTENANCE

SI.PM XXXX HRS PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL Default: 8760

P.1.DN XXXX HRS PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.2.DN XXXX HRS PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.1.MN YES/NO PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE User Entry

P.2.MN YES/NO PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE User Entry

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

6

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

PM (cont) PMDT PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

P.1.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE

SI.ST XXXX HRS STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL Default: 8760

S.T.DN XXXX HRS STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN

S.T.MN YES/NO STRAINER MAINT. DONE User Entry

ST.DT STRAINER MAINT. DATES

S.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

S.T.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL COIL MAINTENANCE

SI.CL XXXX HRS COIL SRVC INTER Default: 8760

C.L.DN XXXX HRS COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN

C.L.MN YES/NO COIL MAINT. DONE User Entry

CL.DT COIL MAINTENANCE DATES

C.L.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

VERS MBB CESR131460-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

EXV CESR131172-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

AUX1 CESR131333-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

EMM CESR131174-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

NAVI CESR130227-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

*Press and simultaneously to obtain version number.

7

Table 4 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

TEST ON/OFF SERVICE TEST MODE To Enable Service Test Mode,

OUTS OUTPUTS AND PUMPS

EXV.A 0 to 100% EXV A % OPEN

EXV.B 0 to 100% EXV B % OPEN

FAN 1 ON / OFF FAN 1 REL AY

FAN 2 ON / OFF FAN 2 REL AY

FAN 3 ON / OFF FAN 3 REL AY

FAN 4 ON / OFF FAN 4 REL AY

FAN 5 ON / OFF FAN 5 REL AY

FAN 6 ON / OFF FAN 6 REL AY

V.HPA 0 to 100% VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB 0 to 100% VAR HEAD PRESS %

CLP.1 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

CLP.2 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

UL.TM 0 to 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CL.HT ON/OFF COOLER/PUMP HEATER

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

move Enable/Off/Remote
Contact switch to OFF. Change
TEST to ON. Move switch to
ENABLE.

RMT.A ON/OFF REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CMPA CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.A1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

UL.TM 0 to 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CC.A2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MLV ON/OFF MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CMPB CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST See Note

CC.B1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

8

Table 5 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS

CEWT XXX.X F COOLER ENTERING FLUID

CLWT XXX.X F COOLER LEAVING FLUID

OAT XXX.X F OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SPT XXX.X F SPACE TEMPERATURE

DLWT XXX.X F LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

SCT.A XXX.X F SATURATED CONDENSING TMP

SST.A XXX.X F SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

RGT.A XXX.X F COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

D.G AS XXX.X F DISCHARGE GAS TEMP

SH.A XXX.X ^F SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

CIR.B TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B See Note

SCT.B XXX.X F SATURATED CONDENSING TMP See Note

SST.B XXX.X F SATURATED SUCTION TEMP See Note

RGT.B XXX.X F COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP See Note

SH.B XXX.X ^F SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP See Note

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 6 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

PRC.A PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

DP.A XXX.X PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE

SP.A XXX.X PSIG SUCTION PRESSURE

PRC.B PRESSURES CIRCUIT B See Note

DP.B XXX.X PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE See Note

SP.B XXX.X PSIG SUCTION PRESSURE See Note

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

ITEM

EXPANSION

Table 7 — Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS

CSP.1 XXX.X

F COOLING SETPOINT 1 Default: 44 F

CSP.2 XXX.X F COOLING SETPOINT 2 Default: 44 F

CSP.3 XXX.X F ICE SETPOINT Default: 32 F

HEAD HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

H.DP XXX.X F HEAD SETPOINT Default: 95 F

F. O N XXX.X F FAN ON SETPOINT Default: 95 F

F. O F F XXX.X F FAN OFF SETPOINT Default: 72 F

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

COMMENT

B.OFF XXX.X F BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP Default: 23 F

F. D LT XXX.X F FAN STAGE DELTA Default: 15 F

FRZ BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT

BR.FZ XXX.X F BRINE FREEZE POINT Default: 34 F

9

Table 8 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS

STST STRT/STOP START/STOP SWITCH

FLOW ON/OFF COOLER FLOW SWITCH

PM.F.1 OPEN/CLSE COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK

PM.F.2 OPEN/CLSE COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK

HT.RQ ON/OFF HEAT REQUEST

DLS1 ON/OFF DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DLS2 ON/OFF DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

ICED ON/OFF ICE DONE

DUAL ON/OFF DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH

CRCT CIRCUITS INPUTS

FKA1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK

FKA2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK

FKA3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 FEEDBACK

FKA4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 FEEDBACK

FKB1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK See Note

FKB2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK See Note

FKB3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 FEEDBACK See Note

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

FKB4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 FEEDBACK See Note

4-20 4-20 MA INPUTS

DMND XX.X MA 4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL

RSET XX.X MA 4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL

CSP XX.X MA 4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

FAN1 ON/OFF FAN 1 RELAY

FAN2 ON/OFF FAN 2 RELAY

FAN3 ON/OFF FAN 3 RELAY

FAN4 ON/OFF FAN 4 RELAY

FAN5 ON/OFF FAN 5 RELAY

FAN6 ON/OFF FAN 6 RELAY

V.HPA ON/OFF FAN SPEED CIRCUIT A

V.HPB ON/OFF FAN SPEED CIRCUIT B

C.WP1 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP RELAY 1

C.WP2 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP RELAY 2

CLHT ON/OFF COOLER/PUMP HEATER

MLV.R ON/OFF MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

10

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

A.EXV OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

B.EXV OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B EXV

CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B (See Note)

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

EXV.A 0 to 100% EXV % OPEN

APPR ON/OFF CIRCUIT A APPROACH

AP.SP APPROACH SETPOINT

X.SH.R SH RESET AT MAX UNL-DIG

S.SH.R DIGLOAD TO START SH RST

SH_R AMOUNT OF SH RESET

OVR.A EXVA OVERRIDE

SPH.A SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.A CIR A EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.1 SPARE 1 TEMPERATURE

EXV.B 0 to 100% EXV % OPEN

APPR ON/OFF CIRCUIT B APPROACH

AP.SP APPROACH SETPOINT

OVR.B EXVB OVERRIDE

SPH.B SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.B CIR B EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.2 SPARE 2 TEMPERATURE

CC.A1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

DPE.R ON/OFF COMP A1 LOAD PERCENT

CC.A2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

CC.B1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDS

METR ON/OFF METRIC DISPLAY Off = English; On = Metric

LANG X LANGUAGE SELECTION

PAS.E ENBL/DSBL PASSWORD ENABLE Default: Enable

PASS xxxx SERVICE PASSWORD Default: 1111

ITEM

EXPANSION

11

COMMENT

Default: 0
0 = English

1 = Espanol
2 = Francais
3 = Portuguese

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

SIZE XX UNIT SIZE

SZA.1 XX COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.2 XX COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.3 XX COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.4 XX COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.1 XX COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.2 XX COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.3 XX COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.4 XX COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE Unit Dependent

SH.SP XX.X F SUPERHEAT SETPOINT Default: 9 F

FAN.S NUMBER OF FANS 1 = One Fan

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

2 = Two Fans
3 = Three Fans
4 = Four Fans

EXV YES/NO EXV MODULE INSTALLED?

A1.TY YES/NO COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

MAX.T 0 to 12 MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

OPT1 UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

FLUD X COOLER FLUID

MLV.S YES/NO MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT Default: No

D.G.EN ENBL/DSBL DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

CSB.E ENBL/DSBL CSB BOARDS ENABLE

CPC ON/OFF COOLER PUMP CONTROL Default: Off

PM1E YES/NO COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

PM2E YES/NO COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

PM.P.S YES/NO COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT Default: No

PM.SL X COOLER PUMP SELECT Default: Automatic

PM.DY XX MIN COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY

PM.DT XXXX HRS PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS Default: 500 hours

ROT.P YES/NO ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW User Entr y

EMM YES/NO EMM MODULE INSTALLED

CND.T 0,1 COND HX

MOPS XX EXV MOP SET POINT Range: 40 - 80 Default: 50

APPR XX CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT Range: 5 - 40 Default: 9.0

Default: Yes

Default: No

Yes = A1 Compressor is Digital

Scroll

Default: 7

Max 12 010,015
Max 10 018-060

Default: Water
1 = Water
2 = Medium Temperature
Brine

0 = Automatic
1 = Pump 1 Starts first
2 = Pump 2 Starts first

0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1
min.

0 = RTPF
1 = MCHX Default MCHX

12

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

OPT2 UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CTRL X CONTROL METHOD Default: Switch

LOAD X LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT Default: Equal

LLCS X LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT Default: Automatic

LCWT XX.X F HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT

DELY XX MINUTES OFF TIME

ICE.M ENBL/DSBL ICE MODE ENABLE Default: Disable

LS.MD X LOW SOUND MODE SELECT Default: 0

LS.ST 00:00 LOW SOUND START TIME Default: 00:00

LS.ND 00:00 LOW SOUND END TIME Default: 00:00

LS.LT XXX % LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT

CCN CCN NETWORK CONFIGURATION

CCNA XXX CCN ADDRESS

CCNB XXX CCN BUS NUMBER

BAUD X CCN BAUD RATE Default: 9600

HP.A HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

A1.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

A2.DT XX

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

HP.B HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

B1.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

B2.DT XX

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch
2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN Control

1 = Equal
2 = Staged

1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads

Default: 60

Range: 2 to 60 F

Default: 0 Minutes
Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

0 = Mode Disable
1 = Fan Noise Only
2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 1
Range: 1 to 239

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 239

1 = 2400
2 = 4800
3 = 9600
4 = 19,200
5 = 38,400

13

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

EXV.A CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

EXV.B CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

MM MOTORMASTER CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

STR.A XXX EXV CIRC.A START POS Range: 0 - 100 Default: 30

MIN.A XXX EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.A XXXXX EXVA STEPS IN RANGE Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

SPD.A XXXXX EXVA STEPS PER SECOND Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200

POF.A XXX EXVA FAIL POSITION IN % Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

MIN.A XXXXX EXVA MINIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.A XXXXX EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR. A XXX EXVA OVERRUN STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.A 0,1 EXVA STEPPER TYPE

H.SCT XXX HIGH SCT THRESHOLD Range: 50 - 140 Default: 115

X.PCT XX OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP Range: 0 - 30 Default: 10

X.PER XX MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL Range: 0 - 30 Default: 5

A.PCT XXX PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

M.PCT XXX PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

S.PCT XXX PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

DELY XXX LAG START DELAY Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

STR.B XXX EXV CIRC.B START POS Range: 0 - 100 Default: 50

MIN.B XXX EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.B XXXXX EXVB STEPS IN RANGE Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

SPD.B XXXXX EXVB STEPS PER SECOND Range:

POF.B XXX EXVB FAIL POSITION IN % Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

MIN.B XXXXX EXVB MINIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.B XXXXX EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR. B XXX EXVB OVERRUN STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.B 0,1 EXVB STEPPER TYPE

MMR.S YES/NO MOTORMASTER SELECT

P.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 1.0

I.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.1

D.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.0

MIN.S XXX MINIMUM FAN SPEED Range: 0 - 100 Default: 5.0

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

0 - 65535 Default: 200

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

* Sizes 010-020 and 035-045, default is 1596. Sizes 025,030, and 050-060, default is 2500.

14

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

RSET RESET COOL TEMP

CRST X COOLING RESET TYPE Default: No Reset

MA.DG XX.X F 4-20 - DEGREES RESET

RM.NO XXX.X F REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

RM.F XXX.X F REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP

RM.DG XX.X F REMOTE - DEGREES RESET

RT.NO XXX.X F RETURN - NO RESET TEMP

RT.F XXX.X F RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP

RT.DG XX.X F

RETURN - DEGREES RESET

DMDC X DEMAND LIMIT SELECT Default: None

DM20 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA

SHNM XXX LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER

SHDL XXX % LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA

SHTM XXX MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME

DLS1 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DLS2 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

LLEN ENBL/DSBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE Default: Disable

MSSL SLVE/MAST MASTER/SLAVE SELECT Default: Master

SLVA XXX SLAVE ADDRESS

LLBL X LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBD XXX LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLDY XXX LAG START DELAY

PARA YES PARALLEL CONFIGURATION Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED)

SLCT SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

CLSP X COOLING SETPOINT SELECT Default: Single

RL.S ENBL/DSBL RAMP LOAD SELECT Default: Enable

CRMP X.X COOLING RAMP LOADING

SCHD XX SCHEDULE NUMBER

Z.GN X.X DEADBAND MULTIPLIER

SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION

EN.A1 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1 Unit dependent

EN.A2 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2 Unit dependent

EN.B1 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1 Unit dependent

EN.B2 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2 Unit dependent

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input
2 = Outdoor Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F

Default: 125F (51.7C)
Range: 0° to 125F

Default: 0.0F (-17.8C)
Range: 0 to 125F

Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F

Default: 10.0F (5.6C)
Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

Default: 0.0F (0.0C)
Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

Default: 0.0F
Range: –30 to 30F (–34.4 to -1.1 C)

0 = None
1 = Switch
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0%
Range: 0 to 60%

Default: 60 minutes
Range: 0 to 120 minutes

Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 50%
Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 239

Default: Master Leads
0 = Master Leads
1 = Slave Leads
2 = Automatic

Default: 168 hours
Range: 40 to 400 hours

Default: 5 minutes
Range: 0 to 30 minutes

0 = Single
1 = Dual Switch
2 = Dual CCN Occupied
3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires

EMM)

Default: 1.0
Range: 0.2 to 2.0

Default: 1
Range: 1 to 99

Default: 1.0
Range: 1.0 to 4.0

15

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

BCST BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST

OAT.B ON/OFF CCN OAT BROADCAST

G.S.BC ON/OFF GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST

BC.AK ON/OFF CCN BROADCAST ACK’ER

ITEM

EXPANSION

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

TIME TIME OF DAY

HH.MM XX.XX HOUR AND MINUTE Military (00:00 – 23:59)

DATE MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR

MNTH XX MONTH OF YEAR 1-12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc)

DOM XX DAY OF MONTH Range: 01-31

DAY X DAY OF WEEK 1-7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc)

YEAR XXXX YEAR OF CENTURY

DST DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

STR.M XX MONTH Default: 4, Range 1 – 12

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

COMMENT

STR.W X WEEK Default: 1, Range 1 – 5

STR.D X DAY Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.A XX MINUTES TO ADD Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

STP.M XX MONTH Default: 10, Range 1 – 12

STP.W XX WEEK Default: 5, Range 1 – 5

STP.D XX DAY Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.S XX MINUTES TO SUBTRACT Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES HD.01 through HD.30

MON XX HOLIDAY START MONTH Range 0 – 12

DAY XX START DAY Range 0 – 31

LEN XX DURATION (DAYS) Range 0 - 99

SCH.N XX SCHEDULE NUMBER Default: 1, Range 1 – 99

SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

PER.1 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1*

OCC.1 XX:XX PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME Military (00:00 – 23:59)

UNC.1 XX.XX PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME Military (00:00 – 23:59)

MON.1 YES/NO MONDAY IN PERIOD

TUE.1 YES/NO TUESDAY IN PERIOD

WED.1 YES/NO WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD

THU.1 YES/NO THURSDAY IN PERIOD

FRI.1 YES/NO FRIDAY IN PERIOD

SAT.1 YES/NO SATURDAY IN PERIOD

SUN.1 YES/NO SUNDAY IN PERIOD

HOL.1 YES/NO HOLIDAY IN PERIOD

* Repeats for Occupancy Periods 2 through 8.

16

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

OVR SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

OVR.T X TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

OVR.L X OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

T.OVR YES/NO TIMED OVERRIDE User Entry

ITEM

EXPANSION

Table 12 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

COMMENT

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

MD01 ON/OFF CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD02 ON/OFF WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD03 ON/OFF MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

MD05 ON/OFF RAMP LOAD LIMITED

MD06 ON/OFF TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

MD07 ON/OFF LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

MD08 ON/OFF LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

MD09 ON/OFF SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE

MD10 ON/OFF MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE

MD13 ON/OFF DUAL SETPOINT

MD14 ON/OFF TEMPERATURE RESET

MD15 ON/OFF DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

MD16 ON/OFF COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

MD17 ON/OFF LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD18 ON/OFF HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD19 ON/OFF MAKING ICE

MD20 ON/OFF STORING ICE

COMMENT

MD21 ON/OFF HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

MD22 ON/OFF HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

MD23 ON/OFF MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

MD24 ON/OFF PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

MD25 ON/OFF LOW SOUND MODE

LEGEND

CSM — Chillervisor System Manager
SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature
WSM — Water System Manager

Table 13 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

CRNT AXXX OR TXXX CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

RCRN YES/NO RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS

HIST AXXX OR TXXX ALARM HISTORY

ITEM

EXPANSION

17

COMMENT

Alarms are shown as AXXX.
Alerts are shown as TXXX.

Alarms are shown as AXXX.
Alerts are shown as TXXX.

Table 14 — Operating Modes

MODE

NO.

01 CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller.

02 WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.

03 MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL Dual Chiller control is enabled.

05

06

07

08

09

10 MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (Configuration

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

ITEM EXPANSION DESCRIPTION

RAMP LOAD LIMITED Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving

DUAL SETPOINT Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points

TEMPERATURE RESET Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leav-

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.

MAKING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set Points

STORING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Points

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set

LOW SOUND MODE Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced capacity to minimize

is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See Cooling
Ramp Loading (Configuration
desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.

schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under
Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F
(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu­rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for
90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to
decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If
the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F
(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu­rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for
90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to
decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

towards the control point.



CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)
during unoccupied periods.

ing fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point
can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to
20 mA signal.

demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to pro­duce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs
or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the
Freeze point.

decreasing faster than -0.5° F per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point
exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.

Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically
load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.



CSP.3) to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.



CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity
may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con­densing temperature.

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity
may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con­densing temperature.

proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop
volume.

by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration

PM.DY).



overall unit noise during evening/night hours (Configuration



SLCTCRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if

®

) control. Override expires after each use.



OPT2DELY).



OPT2LS.MD).





OPT1



FRZ



FRZ



COOL

COOL



COOL





18

CONTROLS

General —

the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and
monitors all operations of the chiller.

The control system is composed of several components as
listed in the sections below. See Fig. 3-5 for typical control box
drawings. See Fig. 6 and 7 for control schematics.

The 30RAP air-cooled scroll chillers contain

Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 8. The MBB is

the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the
major portion of operating software and controls the operation
of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output
channel information received from its inputs and from all other
modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and
suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 15. The
MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor
current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 16.
The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs con­trolled by the MBB are shown in Table 17. Information is
transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus
or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Com­fort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN
and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal).
See Fig. 8.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

module is available as a factory-installed option or as a field­installed accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA
inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point
and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives
the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit
and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the
status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the
control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to
the inputs received.

Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to

monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and
providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or
compressor expansion module (CXB).

AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX is used with the digital

scroll option and the low ambient head pressure option. It pro­vides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control
along with analog outputs to control head pressure control fan
speeds.

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) — The EXV board

communicates with the MBB and directly controls the expan­sion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat.

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/

Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to
control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the
chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off
position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the
Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can
be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of
handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote
Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to
operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN
configuration and set point data. See Fig. 9.

Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off

switch should only be used when it is required to shut the
chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, and
marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all
outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a

3-position instance jumper that must be set to ‘1.’ The elec­tronic expansion valve board (EXV) and energy management
board (EMM) have 4-position DIP switches. All switches are

set to ‘On’ for these boards. The auxiliary board (AUX) has an
8-position DIP switch. Switches 2, 5, and 7 are set to ‘On.’

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be
visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs
(light-emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status
LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every
2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify
that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that
the main base board (MBB) is supplied with the current soft­ware. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still
persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or
blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the
board should be replaced.

GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local
Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking
whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED
which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN
connections for potential communication errors at the board J3
and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is
accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in
parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB
provides both power and communication directly to the
marquee display only.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times
of network communication.

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —

The 30RAP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if
desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded,
3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed
in the field. See Table 18. The system elements are connected
to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The
positive pin of each system element communication connector
must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on
either side of it. This is also required for the negative and
signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections
for CCN should be made at LVT. Consult the CCN Contrac­tor’s Manual for further information.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri­can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual
conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,
Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil
shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,
or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of
–20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413
or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia
(02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication
bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network
to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used
for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white
for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain­ing different colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication
bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is
entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield
must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu­nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another,
the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning
suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the
building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to
the network:

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri­ate colors for different colored cables.)

19

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug,
the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the
(–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is
only intended for temporary connection (for example, a
laptop computer running Service Tool).

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some
routines from running and may prevent the unit from start­ing. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If
conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and
cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of
the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the
bus.

Table 15 — Thermistor Designations

THERMISTOR

LWT J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid

EWT J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid

RGTA

RGTB

OAT

SPT

DTT

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
MBB — Main Base Board

PIN

CONNECTION

POINT

J8-1,2 (MBB) Circuit A Return Gas

J8-3,4 (MBB) Circuit B (035-060 only)

J8-7,8 (MBB) Outdoor-Air Temperature

J8-5,6 (MBB)
TB5-5,6

J6-1,2 (AUX) Discharge Temperature

THERMISTOR INPUT

Temperature

Return Gas Temperature

Sensor
Accessory Remote Space

Temperature Sensor or
Dual LWT Sensor

Thermistor

Table 16 — Status Inputs

STATUS SWITCH PIN CONNECTION POINT
Chilled Water Pump 1 J7-1,2
Chilled Water Pump 2 J7-3,4

Remote On/Off LVT-13,14

Cooler Flow Switch J7-9,10
Compressor Fault Signal, A1 J9-11,12
Compressor Fault Signal, A2 J9-5,6
Compressor Fault Signal, B1 J9-8,9
Compressor Fault Signal, B2 J9-2,3

Table 17 — Output Relays

RELAY

NO.

Energize Compressor A1 (010-030)

K1

Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan Contac­tor 3 (055,060)

K2 Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010, 015 60 Hz)
K3 Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output
K4 Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output

Energize Compressor B1 (035-050)

K5

Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan Contac­tor 3 (055,060)

K6 Energize Compressor B2 (035-060)
K7 Alarm Relay
K8 Cooler/Pump Heater

K9 Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 1 (018-060)
K10 Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 2 (018-060)
K11 Minimum Load Valve

DESCRIPTION

Table 18 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

MANUFACTURER

Alpha 1895 —
American A21451 A48301
Belden 8205 884421
Columbia D6451 —
Manhattan M13402 M64430
Quabik 6130 —

Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

PART N O .

Sensors — The electronic control uses 4 to 7 thermistors to

sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See
Table 15. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors RG­TA, RGTB, EWT, LWT, and OAT are identical in temperature
versus resistance and voltage drop performance. The dual chill­er thermistor is 5 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. Space tempera­ture thermistor is a 10 kat 77 F (25 C). The DTT thermistor
is an 86 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. See Thermistors section
for temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is
installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping
coming from the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is
installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping
coming from the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SEN­SOR — These thermistors are installed in a well located in the
suction line of each circuit.

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) —
This sensor is factory installed on a bracket which is inserted
through the base pan of the unit.

DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR
(DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital
compressor. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close
to the discharge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the dis­charge line using a spring clip and protects the system from
high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is
used. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.

REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — One of
two inputs can be connected to the LVT. See appropriate sen­sor below.

Remote Space Temperature Sensor
33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely mounted
in the controlled space and used for space temperature reset.
The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat
would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be sub­jected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure
to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to
terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature
sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female
connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier
Comfort Network

®

(CCN) at the sensor.

To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for
the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one
SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other
SEN terminal located under the cover of the space
temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6
on TB5 located in the unit control box.

— Sensor (part no.

20

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the
sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11
connector into the CCN (Fig. 11):

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector
wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus
wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 18 for
acceptable wiring.

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the
space temperature sensor terminal block.

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-7

ALMR — Alarm Relay
AUX — Auxilliary
BR — Boiler Relay
C—Contactor, Compressor
CB — Circuit Breaker
CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker
CH — Crankcase Heater
CHC — Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor
COMP — Compressor
CSB — Current Sensor Board
CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch
CWP — Chilled Water Pump
DGS — Digital Scroll Compressor
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
DUS — Digital Unloader Solenoid
EMM — Energy Management
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
FB — Fuse Block
FC — Fan Contactor
FCB — Fan Circuit Breaker
FIOP — factory Installed Option
FR — Fan Relay
GND — Ground
HPS — High-Pressure Switch
LON — Local Operating Network
LV T — Low Voltage Terminal Block
MBB — Main Base Board
MLV — Minimum Load Valve
MM — Motormaster
MP — Motor Protector
MS — Manual Starter
NEC — National Electrical Code
OAT — Outdoor-Air Thermistor
OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SCCR — Short Circuit Current Rating
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
SW — Switch
TB — Terminal Block
TNKR — Storage Tank Heater Relay
TRAN — Transformer
UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Terminal Block

Terminal (Unmarked)

Terminal (Marked)

Splice

Factory Wiring

Field Wiring

Accessory or Option Wiring

To indicate common potential only; not to represent wiring.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of
the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the
space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to
the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor

— For dual chiller
applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual
chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (refer to Configuring
and Operating Dual Chiller Control section on page 36) to the
space temperature input of the Master chiller. If space tempera­ture is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the
Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the
value to the Master chiller.

21

CONTROL BOX

FAN

1

A1

COMPRESSOR

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

EMM

EXV

LON

AUX

UPC

TB1

TB4

CSB-A1

MBB

CHC

CCB

FB-1

TRAN

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

C-A1

MM

MS-

CWP1

CWP1

MS-

CWP2

CWP2

Fig. 3 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP010,015

Fig. 4 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP018-030

a30-4962

a30-4963

FB-1

AUX

LON

EMM

EXV

CHC

CCB-1

CSB-A1

TB1

UPC

TB4

C-A1

FC1/MM

MBB

FB-3

MS-

CWP1

CWP1 CWP2

TRAN

MS-

CWP2

CSB-A2

FC2 C-A2

CCB-2

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

22

Fig. 5 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP035-060

a30-4964

OPTION/TB

DISCONNECT

CHC

EXV

EMM

CB-4

CB-3

TB1

CSB-B2

CSB-B1

UPC

LON

AUX

TB4

MS-

MS-

CWP2

CWP1

FR-4

FR-3

C-B2

CWP2

CWP1

C-B1

MBB

055,060 UNIT ONLY

B2

2

4

FAN

FAN

FAN3FAN

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

1

B1

A2

COMPRESSORS

A1

CONTROL BOX END

FCB-1/2/3

CB-2

CB-1

TRAN-1

CSB-A2

CSB-A1

TRAN-2

23

FC-3

FC-2

MM

FC-1

FR-2

FR-1

C-A2

C-A1

OPTIONAL

Fig. 6A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Power Wiring

a30-4965

DISCONNECT

DISCONNECT

TO FUSED

PER NEC

EQUIP GND

~

FU5

RED

1

H3

H4

TRAN3

X3

WHT

WHT

GRN/YEL

2

GFI-CO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

SILVER SCREW

SILVER SCREW

GRN-YEL

FUSE

NUMBER

FU1 & FU2

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FU3 (24V)

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FU4 (115V)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB1

(NO MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB1

(WITH MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB2

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

FB3

VOLTAGE SERIES

575-3-60 100 H1 & H2

380-3-60 200 H1 & H2

230-3-60 500 H2 & H4

208-3-60 500 H3 & H4

460-3-60 600 H1 & H4

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 1

TB4

XF

RED

7

FU3

RED

A1

SW2

C1

B1

VIO

CB3

3.2 AMPS

TB4

VIO

6

VIO

CB1A

1

2

3

H2

~

SECONDARY

115V

LINE

RESET

TEST

LOAD

UNIT VOLTAGE

208/230-3-60

380-3-60

460-3-60

575-3-60

208/230-3-60

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

208/230-3-60

208/230-3-60

208/230-3-60

TABLE 1

TRAN1

PRIMARY

H2

H1

SECONDARY 24V

X1

BRN

VIO

3

2

BRN

1

VIO

BRN

VIO

BRN

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

TB1A

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

11

PER NEC

12

13

~

FU6

BLK

1

HF

H1

X1

FU4

XF

BLK

2

BRASS SCREW

BRASS SCREW

VOLTAGE SERIES

575-3-60 100 H1-H2 XF-X2

230-3-60 400,500 H2-H4 XF-X2

208-3-60 500 H3-H4 XF-X2

460-3-60 600 H1-H4 XF-X2

REPLACE

TRAN

WITH

SIZE

FNQ-R-3.5

FNQ-R-2.5

200VA

FNQ-R-2

FNQ-R-1.5

FNM-10

200VA

FNQ-R-2.5

AV0056UF & 5UF

FNQ-R-3.5

FNM-6

500VA

LP-CC-20

NONE

KTK-R-15

NONE

KTK-R-20208/230-3-60

LP-CC-20

NONE

LP-CC-20

NONE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

FU1

BLK

FU2

YEL

H3

H4

X2

GRN/YEL

BRN

BRN

C

TB1

UPC FIOP

24VAC

2

GND

UPC

HOT

1

3

J1

3

3

2

1

CWFS

MBB

2

2

BRN

1

1

RED

J2

31

BRN

BLU

21

22

23

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

3

2

1

BLK
BLK
BLK

YEL
YEL
YEL

BLU
BLU
BLU

CONNECTIONS FOR
SECONDARY SIDE

TB4CTB1

5

RED BRN

FIOP/ACCESSORY

J1

3

2

EMM

1

J2

TERMINAL

CH-A1

BLU

T2

T3

T2

T3

FC1

11 21

12

13 23

FC2

11 21

12

13 23

CA1

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA2

11 21

12 22

13 23

22

22

CHC

42

CHC

86

BLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLU
BLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

~

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

~~

~

CH-A2

BLK

WHT

BLK

1

T1

2

T2

3

1

2

3

COMP A1

T3

GRN/YEL

T1

COMP A2

T2

T3

GRN/YEL

L1

CWP1
WATER

L2

PUMP

L3

GRN/YEL

L1

CWP2
WATER

L2

PUMP

L3

GRN/YEL

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

3

2

BLK

BLK

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

~

WHT

OFM1

GRN/YEL

OFM2

GRN/YEL

1

2

3

380V,460V,575V

CCB-1

ONLY

11

BLK

12

YEL

13

FB3

11

12

13

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

208/230V ONLY

21

11

BLK

22

12

YEL

23

13

BLU

CCB-2

11

12

13

MS-CWP1

L1

BLK

YEL

L2

BLU

L3

MS-CWP2

L1

BLK

YEL

L2

BLU

L3

FB1

21

22

23

YEL

BLUBLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

CSB-A1

21

BLK

22

YEL

BLU

23

YEL

BLU BLK

CSB-A2

21

BLK

22

YEL

23

BLU

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

CWP1

L1 T1

T1

L2

T2

T3

L3

CWP2

L1 T1

T1

L2

T2

T3

L3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLUBLK

BLK

YEL

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

FB3

11

21

BLK

22

12

YEL

13

23

BLU

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

NOTES:

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.
ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF
2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED-­ THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE
PHASE CONDITIONS.

5. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION
OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY
CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC
1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,
TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.

7. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,
FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

J1

EXV

J2

DGS FIOP

12

11

J1

AUX

3

3

2

2

1

1

3

3

2

2

BRN

1

1

RED

3

3

2

2

2

BRN

1

1

1

RED

FB1

11

21

BLK

22

12

YEL

13

23

BLU

FB2

11

21

BLK

22

12

YEL

13

23

BLU

MM-A

L1 T1

BLK

L2 T2

YEL

L3 T3

BLU

2

*1

25

2

FC2

11 21

BLK

YEL

22

12

13 23

BLU

BLK

YEL

CHC

42

CHC

86

1

BLK-1

2

BLK-2

3

BLK-3

YEL

MMR

VIO

11 14

240 1/4W

RED

FROM
AUX-J4

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

~

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

~~

~

BLK

8. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,
REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND
WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

9. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018,020: ALL UNITS
025,030: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

10. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018-020: ALL UNITS
025,030: 460V UNITS

11. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

1

2

3

~

1

3

2

OFM1

GRN/YEL

VOLTAGE

208/230/460/575

380

BLK

BLK

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

~

WHT

OFM2

GRN/YEL

ZHBT

061

06A31

1

2

3

24

HEAT

Fig. 6B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Control Wiring

a30-4966

SEE NOTES ON
PAGE 24.

CWPI

SEE

NOTE 8

REMOTE

ON-OFF

SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

5)

DUAL

SETPOINT

J10A

J10B

RLY 11

RLY 9

RLY 10

RLY 5

RLY 6

RLY 7

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

BLK

WHT

MBB

LVT

20

19

LVT

17

11

13

14

15

16

LEN CCN

J1

PORT 2

PORT 1A

J12

6

7

J11

2

3

4

11

12

13

14

9

7

8

6

5

LVT

(+)

(COM)

(-)

SHIELD

UPC

NET +

1

NET -

2

N/C

3

N/C

4

SIGNAL

5

NET +

1

NET 2

2

SHIELD

3

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

1

10

2

11

3

12

4

13

5

14

6

15

7

16

8

17

9

18

10

19

11

20

12

21

13

22

14

23

15

24

16

25

17

26

18

27

BR

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

BLK

RED

OFF

RED

RED

VIO

J13

BLK

1

WHT

2

RED

3

BRN

4

RED

5

BLK

6

WHT

7

RED

8

OPTION

J3

UPC OPT

CB1

3.2 AMPS

CB2

5.2 AMPS

TB4

ORN

5

RED

RED

RED

GRA

PNK

A2

SW2

RED

ORN

C2

ORN

B2

RED

TB4

7

XF

RED

BLK

TRAN1

SECONDARY 24V

X1

FU3

GRA

GRA

MLV-A

MLV ACCSY

FC1

PNK

SEE NOTE 7

ORN

TB4

RED

4

RED

RED

BLK

RED

ORN

HPS-A

BLK

BLK

BLK

ORN

GRA

SEE NOTE 11

SEE NOTE 11

VIO

RED

6

6

GRA

5

5

GRA

4

4

3

J6

HR

ALMR

3

2

2

VIO

1

1

BRN

LVT

J11

18

1

STORAGE TANK
HEATER RELAY

ORN

PL1-2PL1-1

MP-A1

VIO

VIO

VIO

M1

M2

VIO

PL1-6PL1-5

MP-A2

VIO

M1

M2

VIO

LVT

J12

25

1

2

24

ORN

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

ACCESSORY

RED

ORN

ORN

GRA

VIO

RED

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

FC2

ALM

R

TNK

R

CHC

CA1

CA2

CWP

1

CWP

2

RED

TB1

X2

GRN/YEL

BRN

A2A1

A2A1

A2A1

A2A1

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

C

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

LVT

J12

5

21

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

A2A1

A2A1

A2A1

BRN

BRN

BRN

BRN

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

A2

C

C

C

A2

A2

C

A2

A2

MBB J1-2

UPC GND

CWFS 3

EXV J1-2

LVT J12-5

CHC

CA1

CWP1

CA2

FC2

FC1

FC3

TB1

TB1

TB1

CA2

CA1

TB1

CWP2

CWP1

TB4

4

RED

SEE NOTE 9

T2T1MP-A1

SEE NOTE 10

T2T1MP-A2

PL1-4

BRN

BRN

PL1-8

BRN

BRN

PL1-3

RED

RED

PL1-7

RED

RED

BRN

CWFS

4

2

10

10

WHT

1

RED

1

2

WHT

2

3

J3

9

ORN

9

J4

MAIN
BASE

8

8

SW1

A1

ENABLE

RED

C1

B1

RED

GRA

GRA

13

RED

14

CWP2

13

VIO

14

CWP1

BRN

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

LON

GND

NET

J4

1

2

BOARD

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

10

10

9

9

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

J9

J7

J8

J5

BLK

3

4

4

1

RED

1

2

WHT

2

3

BLK

3

4

4

5

BRN

5

6

RED

6

1

1

RED

2

2

ORN

3

3

BRN

4

4

RED

5

5

ORN

6

6

BRN

7

7

RED

8

8

ORN

9

9

BRN

10

10

RED

11

11

ORN

12

12

BRN

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10

1

11

2

12

3

13

4

14

1

15

2

16

3

17

4

18

5

19

6

20

7

21

8

22

9

23

10

24

11

25

12

26

1

MARQUEE

RED

1

DISPLAY

2

WHT

2

3

BLK

3

4

4

5

RED

5

6

BRN

6

2

CSB

3

B2

1

2

CSB

3

A2

1

2

CSB

3

B1

1

2

CSB

3

A1

1

B

C

A

B

C

A

RGTA

OAT

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

+

DPTA

-

+

SPTA

-

LVT

J12 T55

3

4

23

22

T-55

SEN

ACCSY

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

RED

BLK

BLU

BLU

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

6

-

3

5

G

2

4

+

1

3

-

3

2

G

2

1

+

1

12345678

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

ACCESSORY

J3

J4

J9

DGS OR

FIOP

J3

J4

FIOP/

MM

EXV

AUX

EMM

1

1

2

2

3

3

J7

4

4

5

5

PL-EXVA

BLK

1

1

BLK

YEL

2

2

WHT

3

3

J6

4

GRN

4

5

5

RED

7

-

VIO RED

7

8

J2

CH1

BRN BLK

8

1

CH11

RED RED

1

2

J6

-

BLK BLK

2

1

CH9

RED

1

2

J4

-

BLK

2

ON

OFF

J5

J7

J6

1

CH10

1

2

-

2

1

1

GRA

2

2

GRA

3

3

RED

4

4

RED

5

5

BLU

6

6

BLU

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

11

11

12

12

13

13

14

14

1

1

2

2

VIO

3

3

BRN

4

4

5

5

ORN

6

6

7

7

8

8

PNK

9

9

10

10

11

11

12

12

PL50-1

PL50-2

PL50-3

PL50-4

TO MM-A

J10

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

EXV-A

GRY

RED

DUS

DTT

LVT

1

2

ICE DONE

3

4

DLS STEP 1

5

6

DLS STEP 2

DEMAND

+

7

LIMIT

-

8

4-20mA

TEMP

9

+

RESET

-

4-20mA

COOLING

+

10

SETPOINT

-

4-20mA

25

COMP A2

GRN/YEL

TRAN1

H2

H3

H4

SECONDARY 24V

RED

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

FU3

SW2

C1

A1

B1

1

2

3

H1

X1

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 1

1

2

3

CB1A

11

12

13

TO FUSED

DISCONNECT

PER NEC

OPTIONAL

DISCONNECT

3.2 AMPS

CB3

1

2

3

T3

T1

T2

T3

T1

T2

3

2

1

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

XF

VIO

11 21

12

22

13 23

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA1

BLK

YEL

BLU

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA2

11

12

13

21

22

23

CCB-1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLU BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

11

12

13

21

22

23

CCB-2

BLK

YEL

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

BLU

YEL

BLU

GRN/YEL

OFM1

FC3

1

2

3

11 21

12

22

13 23

COMP B2

1

2

3

T3

T1

T2

T3

T1

T2

3

2

1

GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

11 21

12 22

13 23

CB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

11 21

12 22

13 23

CB2

11

12

13

21

22

23

CCB-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLU BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

11

12

13

21

22

23

CCB-4

BLK

YEL

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

208/230V ONLY

BLU

BLU

BLU

BLU
BLU

YEL

YEL

YEL
YEL

BLK

BLK

BLK
BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLUBLK

BRN

FU1

BLK

FU2

YEL

GRN/YEL

TRAN2

COM

RED

7

TB4

VIO

6

TB4

VIO

C

TB1

BLK

YEL

BRN

BRN

PRIMARY

PRIMARY

CONNECT FOR
APPROPRIATE
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SEE TABLE 2

X2

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE

TB HZ

208/230/460/575

160

380

13A 60

FCB2/FB2

NOTES:

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.
ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

2. USE 75

C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF
2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED-­ THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE
PHASE CONDITIONS.

5. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION
OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY
CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC
1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,
TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.

10. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035-045: ALL UNITS

11. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035-045: ALL UNITS

12. MP-B1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035,040: ALL UNITS
045-060: 460V UNITS

13. MP-B2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:
035,040: ALL UNITS
045-060: 460V UNITS

14. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

7. FOR 575-3-60V UNITS, FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FCB2
IS REPLACED WITH FUSE BLOCK FB2.

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

BLU

YEL

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1 & H2

380-3-60 200 H1 & H2

230-3-60 500 H2 & H4

208-3-60 500 H3 & H4

460-3-60 600 H1 & H4

TABLE 1

UNIT VOLTAGE

REPLACE

WITH

FNQ-R-3.5

FU1 & FU2

FUSE

NUMBER

380-3-60

TRAN
SIZE

200VA

FNQ-R-2.5

208/230-3-60

FNM-10

FU3 (24V)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

200VA

208/230-3-60

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 COM & 575

380-3-60 200

230-3-60 500

208-3-60 500

460-3-60 600

TABLE 2

460-3-60

575-3-60

FNQ-R-2

FNQ-R-1.5

COM & 380

COM & 230

COM & 208

COM & 460

208

230

380

400

575
460

8. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,
030-050: FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

SECONDARY 24V

3.2 AMPS

CB4

RED

3

3

2

2

1

1

J2

BRN

RED

2

2

1

J1

1

3

3

EXV

BRN

RED

CWFS

CH-A2

BLU
BLK

CH-B1

BLU
BLK

CH-A1

BLU
BLK

CH-B2

BLU
BLK

GRN/YEL

OFM2

1

2

3

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

GRN/YEL

FC1

1

2

3

11 21

12

22

13 23

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLU

YEL

BLK

CWP1

CWP2

MS-CWP2

MS-CWP1

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

L3

L1

L2

CWP1
WATER
PUMP

L3

L1

L2

CWP2
WATER
PUMP

L1 T1

L2

T2

L3

T3

L1

L2

L3

T1

T2

T3

L1 T1

L2

T2

L3

T3

L1

L2

L3

T1

T2

T3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS FOR

SECONDARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1-H2 XF-X2

230-3-60 400,500 H2-H4 XF-X2

208-3-60 500 H3-H4 XF-X2

460-3-60 600 H1-H4 XF-X2

TRAN3

SECONDARY

115V

WHT

RESET

TEST

GRN-YEL

GFI-CO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

WHT

FU4

X3

X1

LOAD

LINE

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

BLK

2

2

XF

H4

H1

HF

H2

H3

BLK

1

FU6

RED

1

FU5

~

~

~

FU5 & FU6

500VA

FNM-6

FU4 (115V)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

500VA

208/230-3-60

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-3.5

9. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,

REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

050-060: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

050-060: 460V UNITS

GRN/YEL

OFM3

OFM4

(055,060 ONLY)

(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

1

2

3

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

OFM4 (055,060)

OFM3 (035-050)

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

MMR

11 14

*1

2

YEL

VIO

MM-A

GRN/YEL

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

1

2

3

11 21

12

22

13 23

GRN/YEL

OFM1

FC1

1

2

3

11 21

12

22

13 23

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FCB2/FB2

SEE NOTE 7

GRN/YEL

OFM2

1

2

3

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

OFM3

(055,060 ONLY)

(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

BLK

YEL

055,060: FAN CONTACTOR FC3 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR..

208/230V ONLY

BLK

YEL

BLU

11

12

13

21

22

23

BLK

YEL

BLU

11

12

13

21

22

23

FB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

BLK

YEL

BLU

11

12

13

21

22

23

11

12

13

21

22

23

BLK

YEL

BLU

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

FB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

BLK

YEL

BLU

11

12

13

21

22

23

11

12

13

21

22

23

BLK

YEL

BLU

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

BLK

25

2

RED

FROM
AUX-J4

YEL

BLUBLK

FB2 NONE

LP-CC-20575-3-60

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE

208/230-3-60

KTK-R-15

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE

KTK-R-20208/230-3-60

FB1

(NO MM)

FB1

(WITH MM)

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE

208/230-3-60

FB3

3

3

2

2

1

1

J2

BRN

VIO

2

2

1

J1

1

3

3

MBB

BRN

RED

3

3

2

2

1

1

J2

2

J1

1

3

FIOP/ACCESSORY

EMM

BRN

RED

12

2

11

1

J1

DGS FIOP

AUX

2

1

3

2

1

UPC FIOP

UPC

GND

HOT

24VAC

BRN

VIO

42

86

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

1

2

3

BLK

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

3

2

BLK

BLK

~

~

~

~

WHT

~~

42

86

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

1

2

3

BLK

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

3

2

BLK

BLK

~

~

~

~

WHT

~~

VIO

BRN

BRN

BLU

31

240 1/4W

CHC

CHC

CHC

CHC

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

PER NEC

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

21

22

23

TB1A

EQUIP GND

COMP A1

COMP B1

CSB-A1

CSB-A2

CSB-B1

CSB-B2

Fig. 7A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Power Wiring

a30-

5283

26

LEGEND

TERMINAL BLOCK

X

TERMINAL (UNMARKED)
TERMINAL (MARKED)
SPLICE
FACTORY WIRING
FIELD WIRING
ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING
TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL
ONLY,NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

X

9

9

7

7

8

8

4

6

4

6

RLY 9

5

5

1

3

1

3

RLY 11

2

2

A2A1

A2A1

ORN

3

12

1

10

2

11

4

13

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

C

TB1

SW2

C2

A2

B2

9

18

10

19

8

17

11

12

13

14

20

21

22

23

6

15

7

16

5

14

15

16

17

18

24

25

26

27

5.2 AMPS

CB2

A2A1

PNK

A2A1

ACCSY ACCESSORY
ALMR ALARM RELAY
AUX AUXILIARY
BR BOILER RELAY
C CONTACTOR, COMPRESSOR
CB CIRCUIT BREAKER
CCB COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
CH CRANKCASE HEATER
CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATER CONTACTOR
CO CONVENIENCE OUTLET
COMP COMPRESSOR
CSB CURRENT SENSOR BOARD
CWFS CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH
CWP CHILLED WATER PUMP
CWPI CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK
DGS DIGITAL SCROLL
DLS DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
DTT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR
DUS DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID
EMM ENERGY MANAGEMENT
EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE
EXV EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL BOARD
FB FUSE BLOCK
FC FAN CONTACTOR
FCB FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER
FIOP FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION
FR FAN RELAY
FU FUSE
GND GROUND
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
HR HEAT RELAY
LVT LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL
LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE
MBB MAIN BASE BOARD
MLV MINIMUM LOAD VALVE
MM MOTORMASTER
MMR MOTORMASTER RELAY
MP MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR
MS MANUAL STARTER
OAT OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR
OFM OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR
PL PLUG
R RELAY
RGT RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE
RLY RELAY
SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE
SCCR SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
SW SWITCH
TB TERMINAL BLOCK
TNKR STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY
TRAN TRANSFORMER
UPC UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER

RLY 10

J10A

J10B

RLY 5

RLY 6

RLY 7

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

26

25

24

23

22

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

8

8

3

1

3

1

3

1

6

2

4

2

4

2

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

3

4

5

6

12

11

10

9

8

7

3

4

4

3

2

2

1

1

BLK

WHT

RED

J9

21

20

19

18

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

5

4

3

2

1

4

2

1

3

5

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

6

6

5

5

3

3

2

1

1

2

7

7

4

4

J7

MARQUEE
DISPLAY

MAIN
BASE

BOARD

J8

9

9

10

10

6

5

4

3

2

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

J6

FIOP/

M1

M2

SEE NOTE 14

M1

M2

M1

M2

M1

M2

ORN

GRA

A2A1

ORN

A2A1

VIO

A2A1

PNK

FC2

FC1

CB1

CB2

CHC

CA1

CA2

ORN

ORN

7

TB4

RED

SEE NOTE 14

SEE NOTE 14

SEE NOTE 14

RED

RED

RED

RED

BLU

PNK

ORN

VIO

PNK

RED

ORN

ORN

GRA

VIO

J5

GRA

6

6

5

5

RED

BRN

J4

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

CSB

B2

2

3

1

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

A2

2

3

1

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

B1

2

3

1

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

A1

2

3

1

RED

ORN

BRN

EXV

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J4

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

ON

OFF

12345678

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

DUS

3

2

1

3

2

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

J9

2

1

8

7

2

1

8

7

J2

J6

DTT

RED

WHT

BLK

DGS OR

MM

FIOP

MBB

BLK

RED

LVT

4

3

22

23

T-55
ACCSY

SEN

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

12

11

10

9

8

7

J7

EMM

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J3

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

J4

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

12

11

10

9

8

7

J6

14

13

14

13

ACCESSORY

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

10

7

8

9

8

6

7

4

5

9

2

3

10

+

-

COOLING
SETPOINT
4-20mA

LVT

8

1

3

2

5

4

7

6

(+)

(-)

(COM)

SHIELD

LEN CCN

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

NET +

NET 2

SHIELD

NET +

NET -

N/C

N/C

SIGNAL

PORT 1A

UPC

PORT 2

J3

1

2

LON

OPTION

GND

J4

NET

UPC OPT

BLK

WHT

RED

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

OAT

BLU

BLU

PNK

ORN

BRN

VIO

+

-

TEMP
RESET
4-20mA

+

-

DEMAND
LIMIT
4-20mA

LVT

2

1

24

25

ALM

R

LVT

1

18

C

TB1

BRN

MBB J1-2

T2T1MP-A1

T2T1MP-A2

T2T1MP-B1

T2T1MP-B2

SEE NOTE 10

SEE NOTE 11

SEE NOTE 12

SEE NOTE 13

3.2 AMPS

CB1

4

TB4

RED

RED

RED

BRN

UPC GND

BRN

CWFS 3

BRN

CB1

A2

BRN

LVT J12-5

BRN

CHC

A2

BRN

CA1

A2

BRN

TRAN1

SECONDARY 24V

RED

FU3

X1

XF

BRN

X2

GRN/YEL

5

TB4

RED

VIO RED

PL50-1

BRN BLK

PL50-2

RED RED

PL50-3

BLK BLK

PL50-4

BLK

RED

RGTB

BLK

RED

RGTA

2

1

2

1

RED

BLK

J4

CH1

-

CH11

-

CH9

-

-

+

G

-

+

G

2

1

2

1

J5

CH10

-

TO MM-A

SEE NOTE 8

BLK

BLU

EXV-B

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

WHT

BLK

RED

GRN

PL-EXVB

EXV-A

5

4

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

WHT

BLK

RED

GRN

PL-EXVA

J7

J6

RED

RED

BLK

GRY

YEL

BLK

YEL

GRY

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

VIO

RED

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

A2A1

CWP

1

A2A1

CWP

2

BRN

CWP1

A2

MLV-A

GRA

BRN

MLV ACCSY

FR4

2

4

FR3

2

4

FR2

2

4

TAN

TAN

PNK

FR1

2

4

TAN

PNK

PNK

A2A1

BRN

PNK

FC2

A2

FC3

(055,060 ONLY)

RED

RED

4

TB4

ORN

RED

ACCESSORY
STORAGE TANK
HEATER RELAY

TNK

R

BLK

ORN

BRN

C

TB1

BRN

CWP2

A2

BRN

C

TB1

BRN

CA1

A2

BRN

CA2

A2

BRN

C

TB1

BRN

CB1

A2

BRN

CB2

A2

BRN

C

TB1

BRN

CWP1

A2

BRN

FC2

A2

BRN

CA2

A2

BRN

FC1

A2

BRN

FC3

A2

14

15

4

3

12

13

6

5

11

RED

RED

BLU

BLU

DLS STEP 2

DLS STEP 1

LVT

16

17

2

1

GRA

GRA

ICE DONE

SPTB

-

+

DPTB

-

+

A

C

B

A

C

B

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

SPTA

-

+

DPTA

-

+

A

C

B

A

C

B

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

3

4

4

3

2

2

1

1

BLK

WHT

RED

J3

14

13

RED

CWP2

RED

14

13

VIO

CWP1

VIO

BRN

VIO

BR

HR

ALMR

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

RED

C1

A1

B1

OFF

3

2

16

13

6

4

15

7

5

17

9

8

14

REMOTE
ON-OFF
SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

5)

ENABLE

SW1

LVT

ORN

12

11

13

11

14

CWFS

DUAL

SETPOINT

LVT

7

6

19

20

GRA

TAN

RED

RED

RED

GRA

GRA

SEE

NOTE 9

(055,060 ONLY)

(055,060 ONLY)

(055,060 ONLY)

(055,060 ONLY)

SEE NOTE 8

LVT

5

21

BRN

FR110

ORN BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR210

GRA BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR310

VIO BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR410

PNK BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

MP-B1

VIO

VIO

PL2-2PL2-1

VIO

MP-A1

VIO

VIO

PL1-2PL1-1

VIO

MP-B2

VIO

VIO

PL2-6PL2-5

VIO

MP-A2

VIO

VIO

PL1-6PL1-5

VIO

BLU

BLK

BLK

HPS-B

J12 T55

J13

J1

J12

J11

PL1-3

RED

RED

PL1-4

BRN

BRN

PL1-7

RED

RED

PL2-3

RED

RED

PL2-7

RED

RED

PL1-8

BRN

BRN

PL2-4

BRN

BRN

PL2-8

BRN

BRN

BRN

GRA

GRA

BLK

BLK

BLK

HPS-A

J10

J11

BLK

4

WHT

2

J12

CWPI

HEAT

J12

AUX

Fig. 7B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Control Wiring

a30-5284

27

CEPL130346-01

STATUS

LEN

J1

J2

J4

J3

J5

J6

J7

J8

J9

J10

CCN

RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

YELLOW LED ­CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER

K11

K10 K9

K8

K7

K6

K5

K4

K3 K2

K1

Fig. 8 — Main Base Board

Fig. 9 — Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations

SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT

SENSOR

SEN

SEN

LVT

3

4

Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature

Sensor Wiring

T-55 SPACE
SENSOR

CCN+

CCN GND

CCN-

TO CCN
COMM 1
BUS (PLUG)
AT UNIT

1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring

to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector

a30-4967

a30-4968

28

Energy Management Module (Fig. 12) — This

factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is
used for the following types of temperature reset, demand
limit, and/or ice features:

• 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires
field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• 4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires field­supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires field­supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,
50 mA load)

• 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to
20 mA generator)

• Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires field­supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,
50 mA load)

See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on

pages 41 and 37 for further details.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac­turer’s control systems due to possible power supply
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A
signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave
bridge signal generating device is used.

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection — A proof-of-

cooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers. It is recom­mended that proper operation of the switch be verified on a reg­ular basis.

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All units are

equipped from the factory with EXVs. Each refrigeration cir­cuit is also supplied with a factory-installed liquid line filter
drier and sight glass.

The EXV is set at the factory to maintain 9° F (5.0° C) suc­tion superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper
amount of refrigerant into the cooler. The superheat set point is
adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless absolutely
necessary.

The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction
temperature to 50 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for unit to
start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the
compressor.

Capacity Control — The control system cycles com-

pressors, digital scroll modulting solenoid (if equipped), and
minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the
user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. En­tering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB)
to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used
in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity
stages. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automati­cally reset by the return fluid temperature, space, or outdoor-air
temperature reset features. It can also be reset from an external
4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module FIOP
or accessory).

The standard control has an automatic lead-lag feature built
in which determines the wear factor (combination of starts and
run hours) for each compressor. If all compressors are off and
less than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was
turned off, the wear factor is used to determine which

compressor to start next. If no compressors have been running
for more than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is
greater than the saturated condensing temperature, the wear
factor is still used to determine which compressor to start next.
If the leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated con­densing temperature, then the control will start either compres­sor A1 or compressor B1 first, depending on the user-configu­rable circuit lead-lag value. For units with the minimum load
control valve, the A circuit with the minimum load valve is al­ways the lead circuit. The A circuit is also always the lead for
units with the digital compressor option. On units with the dig­ital scroll option, the A1 compressor operates continuously,
providing close leaving chilled water control. For this reason,
on/off cycling of the unit’s compressors is dramatically re­duced, which in turn reduces wear associated with compressor
start/stop cycles.

The EXVs will provide a controlled start-up. During start­up, the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 2
allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional
stages of compression are required, the processor control will
add them. See Table 19.

If a circuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest
wear factor will be shut off first except when a digital compres­sor is used. The digital compressor is always the last compres­sor to shut off.

The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The
algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired
set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and
leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at
which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based
on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio is calculated using
the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any
changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value
ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a
compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the
ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If installed, the minimum load
valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity.
Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity
calculation. The control will also use the minimum load valve
solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last
compressor. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity
step change. Refer to Table 19.

MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed
only in the network display tables (using Service Tool,
ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS
represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start
its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the
machine running in many situations. This can include being
unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in
the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand
Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or
alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and
none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see
below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally
once the time limit has expired.

MINUTES OFF TIME (Configuration
DELY) — This user-configurable time period is used by the
control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after
power is applied/restored to the unit. Typically, this time period
is configured when multiple machines are located on a single
site. For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all
the units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value
of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be
running.

1

/2 minutes to

®

software) and



OPT2



29

CEBD430351-0396-01C

TEST 1

CEPL130351-01

PWR

TEST 2

J1

J2

J4 J3

J5

J6

J7

LEN

STATUS

RED LED - STATUS

GREEN LED ­LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

ADDRESS
DIP SWITCH

Fig. 12 — Energy Management Module

LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable
choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units unless the
unit is equipped with a digital scroll compressor or minimum



load, then circuit A is lead (Configuration
The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as
desired. Set at automatic, the control will sum the current num­ber of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current oper-

OPT2 LLCS).

ating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is
started first. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and
which is the lag are also made when total machine capacity is
at 100% or when there is a change in the direction of capacity
(increase or decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following over­rides will modify the normal operation of the routine.

Deadband Multiplier
Multiplier (Configuration

— The user configurable Deadband



SLCTZ.GN) has a default val-

ue of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than

1.0, this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor.
The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay be­tween adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 13 shows
how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving
water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and
below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0
to 4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.

First Stage Override
the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding

— If the current capacity stage is zero,

the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied

when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of
capacity.

Slow Change Override

— The control prevents the capacity
stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature
is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and
moving towards the set point.

Ramp Loading

tion



SLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving

fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and config-

— Ramp loading (Configura-

ured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons be­fore deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calcu­lates a temperature difference between the control point and
leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F
(2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more
than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP),
the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of
capacity.

Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading

— When the
entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the
control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being
used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes
an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The
lowest stage will not be removed.

Minimum Load Control
control valve is energized only when one compressor is run­ning on circuit A. If the close control feature is enabled the

— If equipped, the minimum load

minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain
leaving fluid temperature close to set point.

30

Table 19 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

0 200 400 600 800 1000

TIME (SECONDS)

2 STARTS

3 STARTS

DEADBAND EXAMPLE

LWT (F)

MODIFIED
DEADBAND

STANDARD
DEADBAND

8

7

6

5

LWT (C)

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

Fig. 13 — Deadband Multiplier

30RAP UNIT SIZE

CONTROL

STEPS

CAPACITY STEPS CAPACITY %

% Displacement Circuit A Circuit B
010 1 100100—
015 1 100100—

018

020

025

030

035

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5

1

040

2
3
4
5

1

045

050

055

2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

1

060

2
3
4
5

*Minimum Load Valve energized. NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity

100
50

20*

100
50

24*

100
50

29*

100
50

32*

100
77
50
23

9*

100
73
50
23

11*

100
74
50
24

12*

100
75
50
25

14*

100
73
50
23

13*

100
75
50
25

16*

staging sequences.

100 —

100 —

100 —

100 —

54 46

47 53

47 53

50 50

46 54

50 50

31

Cooler Freeze Protection

60

160

130

LEGEND

Fig. 14 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor

SCT —

Saturated Condensing Temperature

SST —

Saturated Suction Temperature

a30-4969

— The control will try to prevent
shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm
by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected
is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid
selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set

Points



FRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only

references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze
point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the
freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately
remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every
30 seconds.

Low Saturated Suction Protection

— The control will try to
prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction
conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert
conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction tempera­ture to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set

Points



FRZBR.FZ). The Brine Freeze point is a user-

configurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100%
water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with
brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the
freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly
set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the
brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7
(Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Circuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capaci­ty is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down.

Head Pressure Control — The main base board

(MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest
condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit
efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing tempera­ture input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside
air temperature sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater
than 70 F before a circuit is starting, then all condenser fan
stages will be energized. A fan stage is increased based on
SCT (saturated condensing temperature). When the highest
SCT is greater than the Fan On Set Point (Set

Points



HEADF. O N ), then an additional stage of fan will

170

be added to the current fan stage. Fan On Set Point (F. O N )
equals Head Set Point (Set Points



HEADH.DP) except

after a fan stage increase when the Head Set Point is increased
by Fan Stage Delta (Set Points



HEADF. D L T ). A fan

stage is decreased when the SCTs of both circuits are less than
the Fan Off Set Point (Set Points



HEAD F. O F F ) for

two minutes. Table 20 shows the number of fan stages, contac­tors energized and the fans that are on during the fan stage.
Unit sizes 035 to 060 have common fan control. Figure 14
shows the location of each fan and compressor within the unit.

MOTORMASTER

®

V OPTION — Motormaster V is stan­dard on 30RAP010 and 015 size units. For all other units that
need low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be
equipped with the Motormaster V head pressure controller op­tion or accessory. The controller is energized with the first fan
stage and adjusts fan speed to maintain a SCT of 72 F (22.2 C).
The first stage of fan operation is controlled by the Motormas­ter V controller. Refer to Fig. 15 for condenser fan layout infor­mation. The Motormaster is configured in the Motormaster Se­lect (Configuration

MM

MMR.S)

Operation of Machine Based on Control
Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Set­tings —

configuration of the Control Method (Configura­tion
uration

configured with Cooling Set Point Select set to 0 (single set
point). With the control method set to 0, simply switching the
Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote
Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller
in an occupied state. The control mode (Operating

Modes

Off and will be 5 (ON LOCAL) when in the Enable position or
Remote Contact position with external contacts closed.

Machine On/Off control is determined by the



OPT2CTRL) and Cooling Set Point Select (Config-



SLCTCLSP) variables. All units are factory



MODE) will be 1 (OFF LOCAL) when the switch is

1

150

140

120

110

SCT (F)

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 304050607080

SST (F)

32

Table 20 — Fan Stages

Top View

Top View Top View

Sizes 010,015

Sizes 035-050 Sizes 055,060

CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX

CONTROL BOX

OFM1

OFM2

OFM3

OFM3

OFM4

OFM2

OFM1

OFM1

Top View
Sizes 018-030

CONTROL BOX

OFM1

OFM2

Fig. 15 — 30RAP Condenser Fan Layout

a30-4970

30RAP UNIT SIZE

010,015 Stage 1 — OFM1

018-030

035-050

055,060

Fan Stage Contactor Energized Fans Operating

Stage 1
Stage 2

Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3

Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4

Two other control methods are available for Machine On/

Off control:
OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE (Configuration



CTRL = 2) — The main base board will use the operating
schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scroll­ing marquee display. These schedules are identical. The sched­ule number must be set to 1 for local schedule.

The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99
for operation under a CCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact posi­tion. The control mode (Operating Modes
1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the
Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of
day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control



MODE) will be

mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied
period.

CCN CONTROL (Configuration
An external CCN device such as Chillervisor System Manager
controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device



OPT2CTRL = 3) —

forces the variable ‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control
the chiller. The control mode (Operating Modes



will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 2
when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and



OPT2

MODE)

FAN STAGES

FC1

FC1,2

FC1
FC2

FC1,2

FC3
FC1,3
FC3,2

FC1,2,3

OFM1

OFM1,2

OFM3

OFM1,2

OFM1,2,3

OFM4

OFM4,3

OFM4,1,2

OFM1,2,3,4

the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode
will be 6 when the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’

Table 20 illustrates how the control method and cooling set
point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the
set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the
ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.

Cooling Set Point Select

SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1
(Set Points

DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set
Point 1 (Set Points
Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

Points

DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on
Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points
Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

Points

configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only
from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Ap­pendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is
set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied
mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See
Table 21.



COOLCSP.1).



COOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set



COOLCSP.2) when they are closed.



COOLCSP.1) during the



COOLCSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as

33

Table 21 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

CONTROL

TYPE

(CTRL)

0 (switch)

2 (Occupancy)

3 (CCN)

*Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.

†Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to energy management module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5.

OCCUPANCY

STATE

Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP1 ON†
Unoccupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 ON
Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* Illegal ON†
Unoccupied OFF OFF Illegal OFF
Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP1 ON†
Unoccupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 ON†

0

(single)

4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external
4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module
(EMM).

Low Sound Mode Operation — All models are fac-

tory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the
Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for Low
Sound Mode Select (Configuration
Sound Start Time (Configuration



OPT2LS.MD), Low



OPT2LS.ST), Low

Sound End Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ND) and Low
Sound Capacity Limit (Configuration



OPT2LS.LT) are

factory configured so that the chiller always runs as quietly as
possible. This results in operation at increased saturated con­densing temperature. As a result, some models may not be able
to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller operation at rated effi­ciency, disable the low sound mode or adjust the low sound
mode start and stop times accordingly or set both times to
00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day. In addi­tion, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce overall
chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to a user­configured percentage.

Heating Operation — The chiller can be used for pump

outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system operation

COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP)

1

(dual, switch)

(dual, occ)

under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is
no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are
turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain
enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors run­ning. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a
compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other
mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during
the TEST mode. The MODE item (Run Status
display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST
sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chill­er can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal
operation.

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Pack­age —

specific steps should be followed for proper operation.

pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to
check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to
test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation. If
fans turn correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise
rotation of the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to de­termine that pumps are rotating correctly.

If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps,

The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory

can be utilized for heating applications. The heating mode is
activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed switch

CAUTION

input to terminal block LVT-19,20. The control locks out cool­ing when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied boiler re­lay connection is made using heat relay and alarm relay con­tacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist in the con­trol panel near LVT for these applications. Alarms and alerts
A189 through A202 are active during heating operation.

Service Test (See Table 4) — Both main power and

control circuit power must be on.

The Service Test function should be used to verify proper
operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load
valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s), EXVs, and re­mote alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/
Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use
the display keys and Table 4 to enter the mode and display
TEST. Press twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the
password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST
value to the ON position and press . Press
and the button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode.

Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by
changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete
outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for
10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired percentage
when testing expansion valves and Motormaster
When testing compressors, lead compressor must be started
first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control
will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Com­pressor unloaders and hot gas bypass relays/solenoids (if in-

®

V controller.

Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few
seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller
and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation
before operation.

Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify
that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running.
For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one
pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied
with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve
installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate.

Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap® 30RAP ma-

chines equipped with a factory-installed pump package are
configured with the Cooler Pump Control (Configura-

tion



OPT1CPC) = ON.

Machines not equipped with a pump package are config­ured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that
the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute
time delay is required after the command to shut the machine
down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is
required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of
the machine.

With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay
will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e.,
On Local, On CCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze
Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as
an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the
machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time.

stalled) can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays

2

3

(4 to 20 mA)



VIEW) will

34

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At any-

time the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the
following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.

1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE,
(CTRL=0).

2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a
Start-Stop remote contact closure (CTRL=0).

3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule
in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2).

4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination
with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).

As stated before, there are certain alarm conditions and
Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This
sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump
control algorithm.

When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state,
the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler
Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration
This is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default
is 1 minute.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP
CONTROL — With a single external pump, the following
options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration

OFF.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



PM1E) = NO.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



PM2E) = NO.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump
Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil
is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should
be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21. If equipped, the field­installed chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should
be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.

The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the
machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit
consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed
chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump inter­lock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting,
an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up
Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow
switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being
closed, an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened
During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the ma­chine will stop.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP
CONTROL — With two external pumps, the following
options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration

ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



PM2E) = YES.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump
Starters is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter
coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter for
Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between LVT-25 and
LVT-21. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired
between LVT-24 and LVT-21. A field-installed chilled water
pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each
pump’s interlock points on the main base board. The chilled
water pump 1 interlock, CWP1, must be connected to MBB­J7-1 and –2. The chilled water pump 2 interlock, CWP2, must
be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. The chilled water pump



OPT1PM.DY).



OPT1CPC) =







OPT1CPC) =





OPT1

OPT1

OPT1

OPT1

interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application
capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA.

SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single
pump, the following options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration
ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1



PM2E) = NO.

With a single integral pump, the Cooler Pump Starter will

be energized when the machine is occupied. As part of the
factory-installed package, an auxiliary set of contacts is wired
to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. When
the mechanical cooling is called for, the pump interlock and
flow switch is checked. If the circuits are closed, the machine
starts its capacity routine. If the auxiliary contact interlock does
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T190 —
Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not
be allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not
close within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A
T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up
Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at
Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be al­lowed to start.

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds

after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts
Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated
and the machine will stop.

If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open

for 25 seconds after initially being closed, a T194 — Cooler
Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is
generated and the unit is shut down.

If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit

closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF, an
A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off
Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to
start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary

contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is
OFF, a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While
Pump Off Alert is generated. The chiller will not be allowed to
start.

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit

closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 — Cooler Pump and
Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit
will be prevented from starting.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pump can be

started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. To utilize this
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (Configuration



PM.P.S) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the
factory default. With this feature enabled, if the pump is not op­erating, it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at
14:00 hours. If the pump is operating, this routine is skipped. If
the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active, the
pump will not start that day.

DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual inte­gral pump package, the following options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration

ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



PM2E) = YES.

Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice. Cooler
Pump Select (Configuration
defaulted to 0 (Automatic). This value can be changed to 1

35

a30-4979



OPT1PM.SL) is factory



OPT1CPC) =



OPT1CPC) =









OPT1

OPT1

OPT1

OPT1

(Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). If PM.SL is 0
(Automatic), the pump selection is based on two criteria: the
alert status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. If
a pump has an active Alert condition, it will not be considered
for the lead pump. The pump with the lowest operational hours
will be the lead pump. A pump is selected by the control to start
and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover
Hours (Configuration
Lead Pump (Run StatusVIEWLD.PM) indicates the
pump that has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1), 2
(Pump 2), 3 (No Pump). The Pump Changeover Hours is facto­ry defaulted to 500 hours. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Se­lection, any pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to
start.

With the dual integral pump package, the Cooler Pump
Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied
period. As part of the factory-installed package, an auxiliary set
of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump
Interlock, one set for each pump to individual channels on the
MBB. With a call for mechanical cooling, the specific pump
interlock and flow switch are checked. If the circuits are closed,
the machine starts its capacity routine. If Pump 1 starts and the
auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of
the ON command, a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts
Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the
pump shut down. The unit will not be allowed to start. If the
chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute, two
alarms will be generated. A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to
Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/
Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated
and chiller will not be allowed to start. In either fault case listed
above, Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has
failed.

If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does
not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T191 —
Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert
will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not be
allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not close
within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A T193
— Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and
an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up
Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.
In either fault case listed above, Pump 1 will be commanded to
start once Pump 2 has failed.

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds
after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running
Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/
Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm
will be generated and the machine will stop. If available, the
other pump will be started. If flow is proven, the machine will
be allowed to restart.

If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds
after initially being closed is detected by the control, the appro­priate T194 — Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Nor­mal Operation Alert or T195 — Cooler Pump 2 Contacts
Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the
unit is shut down. If available, the other pump will be started. If
flow is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart.

If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch
circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output
OFF, an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump
is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed
to start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary
contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is
OFF, the appropriate T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts
Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. The
chiller will not be allowed to start.



OPT1PM.DT) is reached. The

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit
closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux
Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit will
be prevented from starting.

The control will allow for pump changeover. Two methods
will change the pump sequence. Before the changeover can
occur, the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. During changeover
the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to
avoid a nuisance alarm.

With Cooler Pump Select (Configuration
PM.SL) set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time
limit Pump Changeover Hours (Configuration



PM.DT) is reached, the lead pump will be turned OFF. Ap­proximately one (1) second later, the lag pump will start. Manu­al changeover can be accomplished by changing Rotate Cooler
Pump Now (Configuration
the machine is at Capacity Stage 0 and the differential time limit
Pump Changeover Hours (PM.DT) is reached. If the PM.DT is
not satisfied, the changeover will not occur. With the machine at
Capacity Stage 0, the pumps would rotate automatically as part
of the normal routine.

With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts
First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First), a manual changeover can be ac­complished by changing PM.SL only. The machine Remote­Off-Enable Switch must be in the OFF position to change this
variable. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.P) feature does
not work for these configuration options.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pumps can be
started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. To utilize this
function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (Configuration



PM.PS) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the
factory default. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not
operating, then the pumps will be operated every other day for
2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If a pump has failed and has
an active Alert condition, it will not be started that day.



OPT1ROT.P) to YES only if



OPT1



OPT1



OPT1



Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Con­trol — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of

two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This
control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement
only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the
other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature
thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in
Fig. 16 and 17 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sen­sors section, page 20, for wiring. The CCN communication bus
must be connected between the two chillers. Connections can be
made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Refer to Carrier
Comfort Network
mation. Configuration examples are shown in Tables 22 and 23.

Refer to Table 22 for dual chiller configuration. In this
example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and
the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers
must reside on the same CCN bus (Configuration



CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (Configu-



ration
have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration



uration

the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also in this example,
the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance
Select (Configuration
ance Delta (Configuration
chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (Configura-

tion

will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller
has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Par­allel configuration (Configuration
only be configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and

LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.

CCNCCNA). Both master and slave chillers must

LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/Slave Select (Config-





RSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This

®

Interface section, page 19, for wiring infor-



CCN



RSET

RSET MSSL) must be configured to MAST for



RSETLLBL) and Lead/Lag Bal-



RSETLLBD) to even out the



RSETPARA) can

36

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2

CCN

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1

CCNB

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

CCN

RSET

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RESET

CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLEN

RSET

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL MAST MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST

MSSL

SLVA SLAVE ADDRESS

SLVA 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2

SLVA 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

SLVA

LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBL 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2 - Automatic

37

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

MASTER
CHILLER

SLAVE

CHILLER

LEAVING
FLUID

RETURN
FLUID

THERMISTOR
WIRING*

INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT
LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE
THERMISTOR (T10) HERE

*Depending on piping sizes, use either:

• HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in. sensor/well)

• HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. sensor/well)

Fig. 16 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location

A

B

1/4 N.P.T.

0.505/0.495

0.61
DIA

6” MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

Fig. 17 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

PA RT

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS in. (mm)

A B
10HB50106801 3.10 (78.7) 1.55 (39.4)
10HB50106802 4.10 (104.1) 1.28 (32.5)

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

LLBL 2 LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBL

LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLBD 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168

LLBD

LLDY LAG START DELAY

RSET

NOTES:

1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.

2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.

LLDY 5 SCROLLING STOPS

5 VALUE FLASHES

10 SELECT 10

LLDY 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLDY

RSET

PARA YES MASTER COMPLETE

Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configura-

tion of Control Method (Configuration



OPT1CTRL) of

the Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be config­ured for CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled
by Remote Contacts, both Master and Slave chillers should be
enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with
two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact
position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for
CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control).

Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency
Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master
chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.
If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is
generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in
a Stand-Alone mode.

The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its
Control Mode (Run Status
ing setpoint or Control Point (Run Status



VIEWSTAT) and its operat-



VIEWCT.PT).

Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of

handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler
fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through
the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return tempera­ture reset is in effect an average building load reset method.
The control system is also capable of temperature reset based
on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or
from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sen­sors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy
management module (EMM) must be used for temperature
reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 24 and 25.

38

Table 23 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

OPT2

CCN

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS

1 VALUE FLASHES

2

SELECT 2

(SEE NOTE 1)

CCNA 2 CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

CCN

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER

DEFAULT 0

(SEE NOTE 2)

CCN

RSET

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RSET

CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLEN

RSET

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL MAST SCROLLING STOPS

MAST VALUE FLASHES

SLVE SELECT SLVE

MSSL SLVE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

MSSL

RSET SLAVE COMPLETE

NOTES:

1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.

2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.

3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master

4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.

39

Table 24 — 4 to 20 mA Reset

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

SUB-MODE

RSET

NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. No reset will
occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM is required.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

CRST 1

MA.DG

5.0 F

(2.8 C)

ITEM

EXPANSION

COOLING RESET

TYPE

DEGREES COOL

RESET

Table 25 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-MODE

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

COMMENT

0 = no reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA input
2 = Outdoor air temp
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA
Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET

DMDC

SLCT CLSP 0 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with
other control systems due to possible power supply differ­ences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Con­nection of control devices with different power supplies
may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls
incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A
signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal gen­erator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four variables
must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the sub­mode RSET, items (Configuration

figuration



RM.F), and (ConfigurationOPT1RT.DG) must be



OPT1RM.NO), (ConfigurationOPT1



OPT1CRST), (Con-

properly set. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and
Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset example pro­vides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C)
outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at 55.0 F
(12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space temperature reset
example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at

72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C) reset at

68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST should

0 Scrolling Stops

0 Flashing ‘0’

4Select ‘4’

4 Change Accepted

be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable
RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should
occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that
maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set
to the maximum amount of reset desired. Figures 18 and 19 are
examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.

To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the
Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST,
RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 26B
— Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example pro­vides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.0 F (1.1 C)
cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C) cooler T. The
variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature differ­ence (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should oc­cur. The variable RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature
difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset
should occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maxi­mum amount of reset desired.

To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run
Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the active set point
(Run Status

Status





VIEWSETP) from the control point (Run

VIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees reset.

40

Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

CONFIGURATION

*4 items skipped in this example.

SUB-

MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

Outdoor

Air

Space

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST 2 4

RM.NO* 85 °F 72 °F

RM.F 55 °F 68 °F

RM.DG 15 °F 6 °F

ITEM

EXPANSION

COOLING RESET

TYPE

REMOTE - NO

RESET TEMP

REMOTE - FULL

RESET TEMP

REMOTE - DEGREES

RESET

COMMENT

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to TB5-5,6)

Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)
Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C)
Range: 0° to 125 F

Default: 0° F (0° C)
Range: –30 to 30 F
(–34.4 to -1.1 °C)

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

CONFIGURATION

*4 items skipped in this example.

Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM DISPLAY

DISP TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDs

UNIT TYPE X UNIT TYPE

OPT1 FLUD X COOLER FLUID

OPT2 CTRL X CONTROL METHOD

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST 3 COOLING RESET TYPE

RT.NO* 10.0

RT.F 0.0

RT.DG 10.0 F

F

RETURN FLUID - FULL

F

RETURN - DEGREES

ITEM

EXPANSION

RETURN FLUID - NO

RESET TEMP

RESET TEMP

RESET

COMMENT

0 = No Reset
1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)

(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)
2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature
3 = Return Fluid
4 = Space Temperature
(Connect to TB5-5,6)

Default: 10.0
Range: 0° to10 F COOLER T

Default: 0
Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER

Default: 0

F (5.6 C)

F (–17.8 C)

F (0 C)

T

Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

41

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 18 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 19 — Space Temperature Reset

LEGEND

Fig. 20 — Standard Chilled Fluid

Temperature Control — No Reset

EWT —

Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature

LWT —

Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled
fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler
fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 20.
Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point
are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the flu­id temperature set point may be colder than required. If the
leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load,
the efficiency of the machine would increase.

Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature
set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid
temperature or, in effect, the building load.

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy us­age. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be config­ured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will
reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentag­es. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will re­duce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA
input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level
at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed
module and has the ability to limit the current operating capaci­ty to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.

NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input sig­nal types of demand limiting require the energy management
module (EMM).

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to
use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the
type selected.

DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To con­figure demand limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand
Limit Select (Configuration



RSETDMDC) to 1. Then

configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Configura-

tion



RSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2)

to the desired capacity limit. See Table 27. Capacity steps are
controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6 as shown
in Fig. 6 and 7.

For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first
stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand
limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity
entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing
contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit
from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch
2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest de­mand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If
the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the
unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.

To disable demand limit configure DMDC to 0. See
Table 27.

EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to
20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20
mA control set the Demand Limit Select (Configura-

tion



RSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand

Limit at 20 mA (Configuration



RSETDM20) to the

maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an
externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block TB6,
terminals 1 and 5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these
connections to the optional/accessory energy management
module and terminal block. The control will reduce allowable
capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 27 and
Fig. 21.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac­turer’s control systems, due to possible power supply
differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.
The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.
ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A sig­nal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge
signal generating device is used.

42

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To con-

50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA

75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA

100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16 18

20

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT

100

80

60

40

20

0

MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)

Fig. 21 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting

100
(38)

80

(27)

60

(15)

40

(4.4)

20

(-7)

0

(-17)

4 6.3 8.6 10.9 13.1 15.4 17.7 20

4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM

SET POINT, F (C)

90

(32)

70

(21)

50

(10)

30

(-1)

10

(-12)

(FLUD = 2) MINIMUM
SET POINT 14 F (-10 C)

(FLUD = 1) MINIMUM
SET POINT 38 F (3.3 C)

MAXIMUM
SET POINT
70 F (21.1 C)

Fig. 22 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)

EMM — Energy Management Module

figure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the De­mand Limit Select (Configuration



RSETDMDC) to 3.

Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (Configura-

tion



RSETSHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (Configu-

rationRSETSHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time
(Configuration



RSETSHTM). See Table 27.

The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN
system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a
Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the
Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is
set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed con­trol send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will
reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed
Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum

length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The
control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no
Cancel command has been received within the configured
maximum loadshed time limit.

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied

and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be
used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect
the signal to LVT7,8 (+,–). See Table 27 for instructions to
enable the function. Figure 22 shows how the 4 to 20 mA sig­nal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for
fluid types (Configuration
point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the
chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.



OPT1FLUD) 1 or 2. The set

43

Table 27 — Configuring Demand Limit

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

MODE

CONFIGURATION

*Seven items skipped in this example.

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

DISP TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs

UNIT TYPE X Unit Type

OPT1 FLUD X Cooler Fluid

OPT2 CTRL X Control Method

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST X Cooling Reset Type

ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

DMDC* X Demand Limit Select

DM20 XXX % Demand Limit at 20 mA

SHNM XXX

SHDL XXX%

SHTM XXX MIN

DLS1 XXX %

DLS2 XXX %

Loadshed Group

Number

Loadshed Demand

Delta

Maximum Loadshed

Time

Demand Limit

Switch 1

Demand Limit

Switch 2

Default: 0
0 = None
1 = Switch
2 = 4 to 20 mA Input
3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%
Range: 0 to 100

Default: 0
Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0%
Range: 0 to 60%

Default: 60 min.
Range: 0 to 120 min.

Default: 80%
Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 50%
Range: 0 to 100%

Digital Scroll Option — The 30RAP units have a

factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which
provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. The digital
compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location.
When a digital compressor is installed, a digital unloader sole­noid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor.

DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll oper­ates in two stages - the "loaded state" when the solenoid valve
is normally closed and the "unloaded state" when the solenoid
valve is open. During the loaded state, the compressor operates
like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow.

However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity
and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the
system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates
in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If
the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be
operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 sec­onds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33%
of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of
loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from
the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of
capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed.
As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state,
the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the com­pressor sound will change.

The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the op­eration of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to
maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is in­stalled, an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor

(DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the
DUS.

DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a
digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter
(Configuration



UNITA1TY) is configured to YES.

There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (Config-

uration



UNITMAX.T) that is set to 7 seconds, which in-

dicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is
47%. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system.

PRE-START-UP

IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,
complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chiller at
end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-10). The check­list assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record
of unit condition, application requirements, system infor­mation, and operation at initial start-up.

Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks

have been completed.

System Check

1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid
pumps, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to
which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer's
instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have
been properly installed. If the unit If the unit has
field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly in­stalled and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

44

2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling

OIL SIGHTGLASS

Fig. 23 — Sight Glass Location

a30-4978

Set Point.

3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recom­mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to
be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the sys­tem. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature
below 40 F (4.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected
to be below 32 F (0° C), a brine of sufficient concentra­tion must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated
suction temperatures. See Table 28.

4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es).
See Fig. 23. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is

1

from

/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. Adjust the oil level as re­quired. See Oil Charge section on page 50 for Carrier ap­proved oils.

6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

7. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package
pump motors are three phase. Check for proper rotation
of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start
pumps or compressors. To reverse rotation, interchange
any two of the main incoming power leads.

8. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see
Check Refrigerant Charge section on this page).

9. If unit is a brine unit, check to ensure proper brine con­centration is used to prevent freezing.

10. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package
heaters (if installed). Heaters operate at the same voltage
as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.
Heater current is approximately 0.4 amps for 460 and
575 v units. Heater current is approximately 0.8 amps for
230 v units.

START-UP AND OPERATION

NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-10.

Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.

1. Be sure all service valves are open.

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set
point (Set Points



COOLCSP.1). No cooling range

adjustment is necessary.

3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler
pump control).

4. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to
ENABLE position.

5. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func­tioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid tempera­ture agrees with leaving set point (Set Points



CSP.1) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2), or if reset is



COOL

used, with the control point (Run StatusVIEW



CTPT).

6. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see
that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freez­ing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.

7. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section).

Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30RAP units are

shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and
should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after
installation. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until
a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After
leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.

All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.
Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refriger­ant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If com­plete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for
the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is
required, operate circuit at full load and use an accurate tem­perature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the EXV. Use the
Temperatures mode on the scrolling marquee display to show
the circuit saturated condensing temperature (Tem pe ra -

tures





temperatures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C). Block condenser air­flow as required to reach this temperature range. Add refriger­ant until the system subcooling (SCT.A or SCT.B minus liquid
line temperature entering EXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F
(–9.4 to –8.3 C). Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a
circuit through the
suction line.

CIR.ASCT.A) or (Temp er at ur esCIR.B

SCT.B). Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge

1

/4-in. suction Schraeder connection on the

Table 28 — Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume

30RAP

SIZE

010 13 50 0.8 3.2
015 17 66 1.1 4.2
018 20 78 1.3 4.9
020 23 91 1.5 5.7
025 28 112 1.8 7.1
030 33 133 2.1 8.4
035 41 164 2.6 10.3
040 47 186 3.0 11.7
045 53 209 3.3 13.2
050 57 228 3.6 14.4
055 63 251 4.0 15.8
060 68 270 4.3 17.0

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (gpm)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (gpm)

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (l/s)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (l/s)

45

CAUTION

Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do
not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge
pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power
consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be
sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to
prevent freezing.

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES (See Table 29 for 30RAP standard tem­perature limits).

CAUTION

Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid)
temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard
units, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for
medium temperature brine.

High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures
(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approx­imately 60 F (16 C), the unit expansion valve will limit suction
pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overload­ing the compressor.

Low Cooler LCWT
no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). If the unit is the factory-installed
optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can
go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).

Table 29 — Temperature Limits for

UNIT SIZE 30RA 010-030 035-060
Temperature F C F C
Maximum Ambient

Temperature
Minimum Ambient

Temperature
Maximum Cooler EWT* 95 35 95 35
Maximum Cooler LWT 70 21 70 21
Minimum Cooler LWT† 40 4.4 40 4.4

EWT —
LWT —

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).
†Unit requires modification below this temperature.

Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature
Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

— For standard units, the LCWT must be

Standard 30RAP Units

120 49 120 49

457 320

LEGEND

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor
where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

max voltage deviation

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

from avg voltage

average voltage

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference
between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average
across all 3 legs.

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243 v

BC = 236 v
AC = 238 v

1. Determine average voltage:

Average voltage =

243 + 236 + 238

3

717

=

3

= 239

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:
(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v
(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

4

239

= 1.7%

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the

maximum allowable of 2%.

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is
more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company
immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition
is corrected.

Control Circuit Power

— Power for the control circuit is
supplied from the main incoming power through a factory­installed control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.
Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.

LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures
below 45 F (7 C) on size 018-030 units, and 32 F (0° C) on size
035-060 units are expected, accessory Motormaster® V con­trol must be installed. Operating temperatures can go as low as
–20 F (–29 C) on size 010 and 015 units, as standard. Installa­tion of wind baffles is also required. Refer to separate installa­tion instructions for operation using this accessory. Contact
your Carrier representative for details.

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for
chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact
your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for
standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.

VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS
Main Power Supply

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.

— Minimum and maximum acceptable

OPERATION SEQUENCE

During unit off cycle, the control monitors the outdoor air
temperature. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F
(4.4 C), cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are facto­ry installed) are energized. If power is maintained to the chiller
and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF po­sition, these heaters are also energized.

The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE
CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT
position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from
the internal control or CCN network command or remote con­tact closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leav­ing fluid set point. The first compressor starts 1
after the call for cooling.

The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models
or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depend­ing on field configuration. The unit control will override this
selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain
oil return to the compressors. In general, on dual compressor

46

1

/2 to 3 minutes

circuits, the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compres-

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

sor first, especially after long off periods. The MBB controls
fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will auto­matically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors
from operating outside of the specified envelope. There are no
pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers.

For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit con­trols to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load
reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be
unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature be­cause of imposed power limitations.

SERVICE

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during service. There may
be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect
locations to alert others not to restore power until work is
completed.

Electronic Components

CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced elec­tronic control system that normally does not require service.
For details on controls refer to Operating Data section.

Access to the compressors is through latched panels from
beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil
side (sizes 010-030 only). The front door(s) provide access to
the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration sys­tem. For size 010-030 units, access to the controls is through
the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door.
Similarly, the upper center latched door on sizes 035-060 gives
access to the controls. Inner panels are secured in place and
should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 24

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refriger­ant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through
the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase
condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve
operates through an electronically controlled activation of a
stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless
power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator wind­ings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on
the phase relationship of the power pulses.

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating
movements that are transformed into linear motion by the
transmission in the cage assembly. The valve includes a posi­tive shut-off when closed.

There are two different EXVs. See Table 30 for number of
steps. The EXV motor moves at 200 steps per second. Com­manding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to
the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely.

Table 30 — EXV Steps

UNIT SIZE 30RAP EXV STEPS

010-020 1596
025,030 2500
035-045 1596
050-060 2500

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a
thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the
compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pres­sure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature.
The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated
gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer

determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The differ­ence between the temperature of the superheated gas and the
saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board
controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper
motor to maintain superheat set point.

The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approxi­mately 9° F (5° C). Because EXV status is communicated to
the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV
boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then
protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to
compressor start, the EXV will open. At low ambient tempera­tures the EXV is closed at start up. After initialization period,
valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly mon­itoring the amount of valve movement.

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction tem­perature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to
start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading
the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maxi­mum operating pressure). At ambient temperatures above
110 F, MOP is bypassed at start-up to prevent charge backup in
the condenser.

If it appears that the EXV module is not properly control­ling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a
number of checks that can be made using test functions and
initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See
the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs.

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps

below to diagnose and correct EXV/economizer problems.

Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/
Remote Contact (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press
on the Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears
on the display. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test
mode. Press . The display will be:

> TEST OFF
OUTS
COMP

Press (password entry may be required) and use

to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Switch the EOR switch to
Enable. The Service Test mode is now enabled. Move the
pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press . Move the
pointer to item EXV.A or EXV.B as needed. Press and
the valve position will flash. Use to select 100% valve
position (hold for quick movement) and press .

The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by
placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve
body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in
the orifice. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator
when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surround­ings are relatively quiet). Press again twice if necessary to
confirm this. To close the valve, press , select 0% with

and press . The actuator should knock when it reaches
the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not
working properly, continue with the checkout procedure
below:

Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on
the EXV module (see Fig. 25). Connect positive test lead to red
wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A, EXV-J7 terminal 3 for
Circuit B). Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the
Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test
to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any
other pin as board damage will occur.

47

Fig. 24 — Electronic Expansion Valve Details

a30-4971

ENTER

INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT

CABLE

CABLE

CABLE RETAINER

MOTOR AND

MOTOR ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

CABLE
RETAINER

GASKET

SIGHTGLASS

SPORLAN

During the next several seconds, carefully connect the nega­tive test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Cir­cuit A, plug J7 for Circuit B). Digital voltmeters will average
this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If it remains con­stant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts, remove
the connector to the valve and recheck.

Press and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4 po­sition DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to
On). If a problem still exists, replace the EXV module. If the
reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should
be checked. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting
wiring.

1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure
they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV
driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin
terminals.

3. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Re­move the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A, J7 for Cir­cuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings be­tween pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for
the other winding (see Fig. 25). The resistance should be
100 ohms ± 10 ohms.

FLOW
DIRECTION

MOTOR ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

NORMAL
FLOW
DIRECTION

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — The EXV valves
on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 can be serviced. The EXV valves
on all other sizes are hermetic and cannot be disassembled for
installation or during service, however, the cable and retainer
may be replaced if necessary. Motor kits for the EXV valve are
available as replacement parts.

To remove the valve from the system, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the
circuit.

2. Disconnect the line voltage to the valve controller. Dis­connect the valve wires from the controller.

3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance
of each motor phase. Resistance between black and white
leads or between the red and green leads should be ap­proximately 100 ohms. Differences of more than 10% be­tween phases indicate a defective motor. Resistance be­tween black and red, or any lead and piping, should be in­finite or “open”. Any resistance reading will indicate a
shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced.

4. The output of the controller to the valve can be tested
with the following procedure:

a. Disconnect supply voltage to the controller.

48

b. Place a digital voltmeter, on 20-volt AC scale,

BLK

WHT

GRN

RED

BLK

WHT

GRN

RED

Fig. 25 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module

a30-4972

across the black and white terminals on the con­troller. Restore power to the controller. For at least
7 seconds, the voltmeter should read approxi­mately 12 to 14 volts. Significant differences mean
the controller is defective or not properly config­ured for the EXV valve.

c. Repeat the procedure in Step b above using the red

and green terminals on the controller. If the con­troller responds properly, then the wiring may be
damaged or the valve may be plugged with debris
or otherwise obstructed.

d. The EXV valves on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 may

be disassembled for cleaning, inspection or motor
assembly replacement.

VALVE REPLACEMENT — The valve may be replaced by
unsoldering or cutting the piping. A tubing cutter must be used
to prevent creating contaminants in the piping.

VALVE REASSEMBLY — Perform the following procedure
to reassemble the EXV valve:

1. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will re­tract the white polyester driver/piston fully into the driver
guide. Remove power from the valve or controller.

2. Lightly oil the threads, and gasket or knife-edge on the
new motor adaptor. Carefully seat the adaptor on the
valve body or engage and tighten the lock nut if used.
Lock nuts should be torqued to approximately 45 ft-lb.
One eighth turn more than hand tight is sufficient to
achieve a leak proof seal on knife-edge joints.

3. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced
on the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement
of the alignment key. Snap on the cable retainer.

4. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.

5. Reapply power to the ComfortLink™ controller. Since,
during service, valve position as calculated by the con­troller will be lost, the controller should be initialized at
least twice. In some instances, cycling power to the con­troller will accomplish this.

CAUTION

If the existing motor has been removed for inspection or
cleaning, be sure that the piston is fully retracted into the
motor assembly before installation on the valve. Failure to
do so will permanently damage the drive and motor.
Replacement motor assemblies are shipped in the retracted
position and may be installed as received.

Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. 26
and 27) —

from one to four compressors. The size 010-030 units are a sin­gle refrigeration circuit while sizes 035-060 are dual circuit. A
compressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit,
depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit
installation.

Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the
compressor power and ground connections. Remove the cable
from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections
from the high-pressure switch. Knock the same holes out of the
new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors
from the old compressor.

The compressors are bolted to rails, which are in turn bolted
to the unit basepan for all sizes except 010 and 015 which are
directly bolted to the basepan. Remove the 4 bolts holding the
compressor to the rail on the basepan. Save the mounting hard­ware for use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the com­pressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close
to the compressor as feasible. Remove high-pressure switch
and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal.
Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the
rubber mounting grommets (single compressor circuits) or
steel spacers (dual compressor circuits). Remove the old com­pressor from the unit.

Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan. Lifting
one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compres­sor mounting grommets. Using new tubing as required, recon­nect compressor suction and discharge lines. Using hardware
saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the
compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze suction and
discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil equalization
line on dual compressor circuit models.

Reconnect the compressor power connections and high­pressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. Refer to
Fig. 26 and 27. Following the installation of the new compres­sor, tighten all hardware to the following specifications. (See
Table 31.)

Compressor Mounting
Bolts

Compressor Power
Connections

Compressor Ground
Terminal Connections

All models contain scroll compressors and have

Table 31 — Unit Torque Specification

FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE

7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)

24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7- to 3.2 N-m)

14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)

Cooler

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER RE­PLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be
repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water)
develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a
brazed-plate heat exchanger:

1. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as
the original heat exchanger. The unit insulation covers the
manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the
replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the
same.

49

2. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the
heat exchanger.

3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the
refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.

4. Remove the old heat exchanger. The replacement heat ex­changer is supplied fully insulated. It also includes a cool­er heater. Use of the heater is not required unless the orig­inal cooler contained a factory installed heater.

5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and at­tach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights
(sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 035-060)
using the hardware removed in Step 4. Reconnect the
cooler heater if required. For sizes 010-025, torque the
bolts to 7-10 ft-lb. For sizes 030-060, torque the bolts to
30-50 ft-lb.

6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on
the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver
as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver.
Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under nor­mal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the cop­per solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from chang­ing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal
or external leakage at the connections which cannot be re­paired. Braze the liquid lines with a heat sink around the
expansion valve to protect it from excess heat.

7. Reconnect the water/brine lines.

8. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER
CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be
cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in
chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phos­phoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%
oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the
exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning,
rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the
acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.

The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/
brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodi­cally, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.

Oil Charge

Mobil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EAL Arctic 32-3MA

Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF

Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has

been exposed to atmosphere.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con­denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage
the coil.

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the
coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should
be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the
coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and
brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety­glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and
gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens­er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean­ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and
uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray
straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de­gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the
core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent
damage to air centers.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between
air centers and refrigerant tubes.

CAUTION

The compressor in a Puron® refigerant (R-410A) system
uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. This is extremely hygro­scopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can
absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for
HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all necessary precau­tions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure
to do so could result in possible equipment damage.

Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil. Use
only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be visible in
compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is from

3

/8 of sight glass. All compressors must be off when checking
oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as
follows:

ADD OIL — Recover charge from the unit. Add oil to suction
line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the com­pressor Schrader on the trio's and single compressor circuits.
(See Fig. 26 and 27.) When oil can be seen at the bottom of the
sight glass, add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately

1

/8 in oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off
to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is
present.

NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved
sources are:

Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3MAF POE, P903-1601

1

/8 to

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to main­tain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described
below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter
drier is a sealed-type drier. When the drier needs to be
changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced.

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per
circuit.

MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located
immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the
refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for
refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit
loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the
sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system
or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system,
measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the
indicator as follows:

Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm
Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm
Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm

The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the
moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in
contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in
the system, change the corresponding filter drier.

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have one indicator
per circuit.

50

A1

A2

B1

B2

OIL
SIGHTGLASS

DISCHARGE
ACCESS
VALVE

FLOW
SWITCH

LWT

DTT

DISCHARGE
ACCESS
VALVE

DPT

HPS

RGT

SPT

SUCTION

ACCESS
VALVE

RGT

SPT

DPT

HPS

EWT

EWT

Fig. 26 — Compressor Location — 30RAP010-030

Fig. 27 — Compressor Location — 30RAP035-060

LEGEND FOR FIG. 26 AND 27

DPT — Discharge Pressure Thermostat
DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor
EWT — Entering Water Thermistor
HPS — High Pressure Switch
LWT — Leaving Water Thermistor
RGT — Return Gas Thermistor
SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

a30-4973

a30-4974

SUCTION
ACCESS
VALV E

HPSDPT

SPT

RGT

COMPRESSOR A2

LWT

FLOW
SWITCH

DTT

COMPRESSOR A1

51

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the
factory-installed capacity reduction option, a solenoid valve
and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located
between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant
line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load
valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the
suction pressure set point and the valve.

The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the mini­mum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with
the minimum load valve is shown in Table 19.

PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pres­sure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which re­lieves at 210 F (100 C).

Check Unit Safeties

HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is
provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system
from unsafe high pressure conditions. See Table 32 for high­pressure switch settings.

The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of
each circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist,
the switch opens and shuts off the affected circuit. The CSB
senses the compressor feedback signal and generates an appro­priate alarm. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting un­til the alert condition is reset. The switch should open at the
pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as
shown in Table 32.

Table 32 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure

Switch (Fixed)

UNIT

30RA 650 4482 500 3447

CUTOUT CUT-IN

Psig kPa Psig kPa

Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display as de­scribed on page 63. The unit should restart after the compressor
anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module,
expires.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is
equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer.
These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the sta­tus of the unit, but to also maintain operation of the chiller
within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. The in­put to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also
used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure
conditions and low superheat conditions. In some cases, the
unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The control module
will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to
maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures.

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

WARNING

On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solu­tion must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a tem­perature of at least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid
temperature set point. Failure to provide the proper anti­freeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair
or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty.

The main base board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid temper­ature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of ca­pacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the
rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.

When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures
(34 F [1° C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using
inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.

HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or
hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from
the outside-air temperature sensor. These heaters, when in­stalled, are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic pack­age from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C). Power for these heat­ers is supplied from the main unit power.

The input from the low pressure transducer provides a back­up cooler freeze protection package. The MBB shuts down the
unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the
cooler to freeze up.

CAUTION

Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing com­pressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4.4 C).
The compressors have either a single circuit breaker or
multiple circuit breakers which can be used to shut off
power to the compressors. If power to the unit must be off
for a prolonged period, drain the cooler, hydronic package
(if installed) and internal piping. Add glycol according to
Winter Shutdown Step 2 below.

WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season:

1. Drain the fluid from the cooler, hydronic package (if in­stalled) and internal piping.

2. Fill the cooler and hydronic package with at least 2 gal­lons (7.6 L) of inhibited propylene glycol or other suit­able inhibited antifreeze solution to prevent any residual
water in the cooler and hydronic package/piping from
freezing.

3. At the beginning of the next cooling season, refill the
cooler and add the recommended inhibitor.

Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5 k

thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of
the chiller. Thermistors EWT, LWT, RGTA, RGTB, and OAT
are identical in their temperature and voltage drop perfor­mance. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10 k in­put channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. resis­tance and voltage drop performance. Resistance at various tem­peratures are listed in Tables 33-37. For dual chiller operation,
a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5 k thermistor.
When a digital compressor is used, a DTT (digital temperature
thermistor) is used. The DTT is an 86 k thermistor.

REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT) — Add
a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor
well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten the retaining nut
¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 28.

THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A
high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this
check.

1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate the­mistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base
Board (see Fig. 29).

2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem­perature from Tables 33-37.

3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at
probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem­perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to
avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading.
Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature
determined from thermistor voltage reading should be
close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermo­couple and taking readings.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down
and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature
(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage
drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter­mining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor

52

disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the

5/8 in. HEX

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

1/4-18 NPT

Fig. 28 — Thermistor Well

value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the
scrolling marquee display.

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge

transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished
by the color of the transducer body, suction (yellow) and dis­charge (red). No pressure transducer calibration is required.
The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is generated
by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 29 for transducer con­nections to the J8 connector on the MBB.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of be­ing faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply
voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,
compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee
display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure
gauge. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. If the
two readings are not reasonably close, replace the pressure
transducer.

Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed

flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units
without the factory-installed hydronic package. See Fig. 30.
Units with the optional hydronic package have the flow switch
installed in the entering fluid piping. This is a thermal-disper­sion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set
for approximately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two
thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in
the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. This thermistor is
used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The
second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is af­fected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The
thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall
of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated
from each other within the confines of the probe.

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the
thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the
probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried
away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a
function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing
liquid.

The difference in temperature between the two thermistors
provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe.
When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away
from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will
be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken
from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in tem­perature differential.

When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then
the output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove
flow has been established.

For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for
build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If

necessary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common
vinegar cleansing agent.

The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indi­cate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch
contacts. The LEDs are as follows:

• Green LED ON – 24 vac present

• One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN

• Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED

If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the
steps below to correct the situation:

1. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is
clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the
screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled
pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not
been changed.

2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/
pump system and compare this to the system requirements.

3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter­minal block are secure.

4. For factory-installed hydronic systems, verify that:

• All air has been purged from the system.

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

5. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not
providing sufficient flow.

6. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise
when viewed from motor end of pump.

Strainer — Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is

required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi
(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pres­sure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the factory­installed blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut
the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When
strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Mainte­nance Done (Run Status

PM

S.T.MN).

Condenser Fans — Each fan is supported by a formed

wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard.
METAL FANS — The exposed end of fan motor shaft is pro-

tected from weather by grease and a rubber boot. If fan motor
must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re­grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. For proper perfor­mance with the value sound fan option, fan web should be

0.32 in. (8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of
the fan hub. (See Fig. 31.) Tighten set screws to 15 ± 1 ft-lb
(20 ± 1.3 N-m).

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clockwise
when viewed from above). If necessary, switch any
2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

53

Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(F)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 3.699 98,010
–24 3.689 94,707
–23 3.679 91,522
–22 3.668 88,449
–21 3.658 85,486
–20 3.647 82,627
–19 3.636 79,871
–18 3.624 77,212
–17 3.613 74,648
–16 3.601 72,175
–15 3.588 69,790
–14 3.576 67,490
–13 3.563 65,272
–12 3.550 63,133
–11 3.536 61,070
–10 3.523 59,081

–9 3.509 57,162
–8 3.494 55,311
–7 3.480 53,526
–6 3.465 51,804
–5 3.450 50,143
–4 3.434 48,541
–3 3.418 46,996
–2 3.402 45,505
–1 3.386 44,066

0 3.369 42,679
1 3.352 41,339
2 3.335 40,047
3 3.317 38,800
4 3.299 37,596
5 3.281 36,435
6 3.262 35,313
7 3.243 34,231
8 3.224 33,185

9 3.205 32,176
10 3.185 31,202
11 3.165 30,260
12 3.145 29,351
13 3.124 28,473
14 3.103 27,624
15 3.082 26,804
16 3.060 26,011
17 3.038 25,245
18 3.016 24,505
19 2.994 23,789
20 2.972 23,096
21 2.949 22,427
22 2.926 21,779
23 2.903 21,153
24 2.879 20,547
25 2.856 19,960
26 2.832 19,393
27 2.808 18,843
28 2.784 18,311
29 2.759 17,796
30 2.735 17,297
31 2.710 16,814
32 2.685 16,346
33 2.660 15,892
34 2.634 15,453
35 2.609 15,027
36 2.583 14,614
37 2.558 14,214
38 2.532 13,826
39 2.506 13,449
40 2.480 13,084
41 2.454 12,730
42 2.428 12,387
43 2.402 12,053
44 2.376 11,730
45 2.349 11,416
46 2.323 11,112
47 2.296 10,816
48 2.270 10,529
49 2.244 10,250
50 2.217 9,979
51 2.191 9,717
52 2.165 9,461
53 2.138 9,213
54 2.112 8,973
55 2.086 8,739
56 2.060 8,511
57 2.034 8,291
58 2.008 8,076

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

59 1.982 7,686
60 1.956 7,665
61 1.930 7,468
62 1.905 7,277
63 1.879 7,091
64 1.854 6,911
65 1.829 6,735
66 1.804 6,564
67 1.779 6,399
68 1.754 6,238
69 1.729 6,081
70 1.705 5,929
71 1.681 5,781
72 1.656 5,637
73 1.632 5,497
74 1.609 5,361
75 1.585 5,229
76 1.562 5,101
77 1.538 4,976
78 1.516 4,855
79 1.493 4,737
80 1.470 4,622
81 1.448 4,511
82 1.426 4,403
83 1.404 4,298
84 1.382 4,196
85 1.361 4,096
86 1.340 4,000
87 1.319 3,906
88 1.298 3,814
89 1.278 3,726
90 1.257 3,640
91 1.237 3,556
92 1.217 3,474
93 1.198 3,395
94 1.179 3,318
95 1.160 3,243
96 1.141 3,170
97 1.122 3,099
98 1.104 3,031

99 1.086 2,964
100 1.068 2,898
101 1.051 2,835
102 1.033 2,773
103 1.016 2,713
104 0.999 2,655
105 0.983 2,597
106 0.966 2,542
107 0.950 2,488
108 0.934 2,436
109 0.918 2,385
110 0.903 2,335
111 0.888 2,286
112 0.873 2,239
113 0.858 2,192
114 0.843 2,147
115 0.829 2,103
116 0.815 2,060
117 0.801 2,018
118 0.787 1,977
119 0.774 1,937
120 0.761 1,898
121 0.748 1,860
122 0.735 1,822
123 0.723 1,786
124 0.710 1,750
125 0.698 1,715
126 0.686 1,680
127 0.674 1,647
128 0.663 1,614
129 0.651 1,582
130 0.640 1,550
131 0.629 1,519
132 0.618 1,489
133 0.608 1,459
134 0.597 1,430
135 0.587 1,401
136 0.577 1,373
137 0.567 1,345
138 0.557 1,318
139 0.548 1,291
140 0.538 1,265
141 0.529 1,240
142 0.520 1,214

TEMP

(F)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

143 0.511 1,190
144 0.502 1,165
145 0.494 1,141
146 0.485 1,118
147 0.477 1,095
148 0.469 1,072
149 0.461 1,050
150 0.453 1,029
151 0.445 1,007
152 0.438 986
153 0.430 965
154 0.423 945
155 0.416 925
156 0.408 906
157 0.402 887
158 0.395 868
159 0.388 850
160 0.381 832
161 0.375 815
162 0.369 798
163 0.362 782
164 0.356 765
165 0.350 750
166 0.344 734
167 0.339 719
168 0.333 705
169 0.327 690
170 0.322 677
171 0.317 663
172 0.311 650
173 0.306 638
174 0.301 626
175 0.296 614
176 0.291 602
177 0.286 591
178 0.282 581
179 0.277 570
180 0.272 561
181 0.268 551
182 0.264 542
183 0.259 533
184 0.255 524
185 0.251 516
186 0.247 508
187 0.243 501
188 0.239 494
189 0.235 487
190 0.231 480
191 0.228 473
192 0.224 467
193 0.220 461
194 0.217 456
195 0.213 450
196 0.210 445
197 0.206 439
198 0.203 434
199 0.200 429
200 0.197 424
201 0.194 419
202 0.191 415
203 0.188 410
204 0.185 405
205 0.182 401
206 0.179 396
207 0.176 391
208 0.173 386
209 0.171 382
210 0.168 377
211 0.165 372
212 0.163 367
213 0.160 361
214 0.158 356
215 0.155 350
216 0.153 344
217 0.151 338
218 0.148 332
219 0.146 325
220 0.144 318
221 0.142 311
222 0.140 304
223 0.138 297
224 0.135 289
225 0.133 282

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

54

Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(C)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 3.705 100,260
–31 3.687 94,165
–30 3.668 88,480
–29 3.649 83,170
–28 3.629 78,125
–27 3.608 73,580
–26 3.586 69,250
–25 3.563 65,205
–24 3.539 61,420
–23 3.514 57,875
–22 3.489 54,555
–21 3.462 51,450
–20 3.434 48,536
–19 3.406 45,807
–18 3.376 43,247
–17 3.345 40,845
–16 3.313 38,592
–15 3.281 38,476
–14 3.247 34,489
–13 3.212 32,621
–12 3.177 30,866
–11 3.140 29,216
–10 3.103 27,633

–9 3.065 26,202
–8 3.025 24,827
–7 2.985 23,532
–6 2.945 22,313
–5 2.903 21,163
–4 2.860 20,079
–3 2.817 19,058
–2 2.774 18,094
–1 2.730 17,184

0 2.685 16,325
1 2.639 15,515
2 2.593 14,749
3 2.547 14,026
4 2.500 13,342
5 2.454 12,696
6 2.407 12,085
7 2.360 11,506
8 2.312 10,959

9 2.265 10,441
10 2.217 9,949
11 2.170 9,485
12 2.123 9,044
13 2.076 8,627
14 2.029 8,231

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 1.982 7,855
16 1.935 7,499
17 1.889 7,161
18 1.844 6,840
19 1.799 6,536
20 1.754 6,246
21 1.710 5,971
22 1.666 5,710
23 1.623 5,461
24 1.580 5,225
25 1.538 5,000
26 1.497 4,786
27 1.457 4,583
28 1.417 4,389
29 1.378 4,204
30 1.340 4,028
31 1.302 3,861
32 1.265 3,701
33 1.229 3,549
34 1.194 3,404
35 1.160 3,266
36 1.126 3,134
37 1.093 3,008
38 1.061 2,888
39 1.030 2,773
40 0.999 2,663
41 0.969 2,559
42 0.940 2,459
43 0.912 2,363
44 0.885 2,272
45 0.858 2,184
46 0.832 2,101
47 0.807 2,021
48 0.782 1,944
49 0.758 1,871
50 0.735 1,801
51 0.713 1,734
52 0.691 1,670
53 0.669 1,609
54 0.649 1,550
55 0.629 1,493
56 0.610 1,439
57 0.591 1,387
58 0.573 1,337
59 0.555 1,290
60 0.538 1,244
61 0.522 1,200

TEMP

(C)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.506 1,158
63 0.490 1,118
64 0.475 1,079
65 0.461 1,041
66 0.447 1,006
67 0.433 971
68 0.420 938
69 0.407 906
70 0.395 876
71 0.383 836
72 0.371 805
73 0.360 775
74 0.349 747
75 0.339 719
76 0.329 693
77 0.319 669
78 0.309 645
79 0.300 623
80 0.291 602
81 0.283 583
82 0.274 564
83 0.266 547
84 0.258 531
85 0.251 516
86 0.244 502
87 0.237 489
88 0.230 477
89 0.223 466
90 0.217 456
91 0.211 446
92 0.204 436
93 0.199 427
94 0.193 419
95 0.188 410
96 0.182 402
97 0.177 393
98 0.172 385

99 0.168 376
100 0.163 367
101 0.158 357
102 0.154 346
103 0.150 335
104 0.146 324
105 0.142 312
106 0.138 299
107 0.134 285

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

55

Table 35 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(F)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 4.758 196,453
–24 4.750 189,692
–23 4.741 183,300
–22 4.733 177,000
–21 4.724 171,079
–20 4.715 165,238
–19 4.705 159,717
–18 4.696 154,344
–17 4.686 149,194
–16 4.676 144,250
–15 4.665 139,443
–14 4.655 134,891
–13 4.644 130,402
–12 4.633 126,183
–11 4.621 122,018
–10 4.609 118,076

–9 4.597 114,236
–8 4.585 110,549
–7 4.572 107,006
–6 4.560 103,558
–5 4.546 100,287
–4 4.533 97,060
–3 4.519 94,020
–2 4.505 91,019
–1 4.490 88,171

0 4.476 85,396
1 4.461 82,729
2 4.445 80,162
3 4.429 77,662
4 4.413 75,286
5 4.397 72,940
6 4.380 70,727
7 4.363 68,542
8 4.346 66,465

9 4.328 64,439
10 4.310 62,491
11 4.292 60,612
12 4.273 58,781
13 4.254 57,039
14 4.235 55,319
15 4.215 53,693
16 4.195 52,086
17 4.174 50,557
18 4.153 49,065
19 4.132 47,627
20 4.111 46,240
21 4.089 44,888
22 4.067 43,598
23 4.044 42,324
24 4.021 41,118
25 3.998 39,926
26 3.975 38,790
27 3.951 37,681
28 3.927 36,610
29 3.903 35,577
30 3.878 34,569
31 3.853 33,606
32 3.828 32,654
33 3.802 31,752
34 3.776 30,860
35 3.750 30,009
36 3.723 29,177
37 3.697 28,373
38 3.670 27,597
39 3.654 26,838
40 3.615 26,113
41 3.587 25,396
42 3.559 24,715
43 3.531 24,042
44 3.503 23,399
45 3.474 22,770
46 3.445 22,161
47 3.416 21,573
48 3.387 20,998
49 3.357 20,447
50 3.328 19,903
51 3.298 19,386
52 3.268 18,874
53 3.238 18,384
54 3.208 17,904
55 3.178 17,441
56 3.147 16,991
57 3.117 16,552
58 3.086 16,131
59 3.056 15,714
60 3.025 15,317

TEMP

(F)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

61 2.994 14,925
62 2.963 14,549
63 2.932 14,180
64 2.901 13,824
65 2.870 13,478
66 2.839 13,139
67 2.808 12,814
68 2.777 12,493
69 2.746 12,187
70 2.715 11,884
71 2.684 11,593
72 2.653 11,308
73 2.622 11,031
74 2.592 10,764
75 2.561 10,501
76 2.530 10,249
77 2.500 10,000
78 2.470 9,762
79 2.439 9,526
80 2.409 9,300
81 2.379 9,078
82 2.349 8,862
83 2.319 8,653
84 2.290 8,448
85 2.260 8,251
86 2.231 8,056
87 2.202 7,869
88 2.173 7,685
89 2.144 7,507
90 2.115 7,333
91 2.087 7,165
92 2.059 6,999
93 2.030 6,838
94 2.003 6,683
95 1.975 6,530
96 1.948 6,383
97 1.921 6,238
98 1.894 6,098

99 1.867 5,961
100 1.841 5,827
101 1.815 5,698
102 1.789 5,571
103 1.763 5,449
104 1.738 5,327
105 1.713 5,210
106 1.688 5,095
107 1.663 4,984
108 1.639 4,876
109 1.615 4,769
110 1.591 4,666
111 1.567 4,564
112 1.544 4,467
113 1.521 4,370
114 1.498 4,277
115 1.475 4,185
116 1.453 4,096
117 1.431 4,008
118 1.409 3,923
119 1.387 3,840
120 1.366 3,759
121 1.345 3,681
122 1.324 3,603
123 1.304 3,529
124 1.284 3,455
125 1.264 3,383
126 1.244 3,313
127 1.225 3,244
128 1.206 3,178
129 1.187 3,112
130 1.168 3,049
131 1.150 2,986
132 1.132 2,926
133 1.114 2,866
134 1.096 2,809
135 1.079 2,752
136 1.062 2,697
137 1.045 2,643
138 1.028 2,590
139 1.012 2,539
140 0.996 2,488
141 0.980 2,439
142 0.965 2,391
143 0.949 2,343
144 0.934 2,297
145 0.919 2,253
146 0.905 2,209

TEMP

(F)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

147 0.890 2,166
148 0.876 2,124
149 0.862 2,083
150 0.848 2,043
151 0.835 2,003
152 0.821 1,966
153 0.808 1,928
154 0.795 1,891
155 0.782 1,855
156 0.770 1,820
157 0.758 1,786
158 0.745 1,752
159 0.733 1,719
160 0.722 1,687
161 0.710 1,656
162 0.699 1,625
163 0.687 1,594
164 0.676 1,565
165 0.666 1,536
166 0.655 1,508
167 0.645 1,480
168 0.634 1,453
169 0.624 1,426
170 0.614 1,400
171 0.604 1,375
172 0.595 1,350
173 0.585 1,326
174 0.576 1,302
175 0.567 1,278
176 0.558 1,255
177 0.549 1,233
178 0.540 1,211
179 0.532 1,190
180 0.523 1,169
181 0.515 1,148
182 0.507 1,128
183 0.499 1,108
184 0.491 1,089
185 0.483 1,070
186 0.476 1,052
187 0.468 1,033
188 0.461 1,016
189 0.454 998
190 0.447 981
191 0.440 964
192 0.433 947
193 0.426 931
194 0.419 915
195 0.413 900
196 0.407 885
197 0.400 870
198 0.394 855
199 0.388 841
200 0.382 827
201 0.376 814
202 0.370 800
203 0.365 787
204 0.359 774
205 0.354 762
206 0.349 749
207 0.343 737
208 0.338 725
209 0.333 714
210 0.328 702
211 0.323 691
212 0.318 680
213 0.314 670
214 0.309 659
215 0.305 649
216 0.300 639
217 0.296 629
218 0.292 620
219 0.288 610
220 0.284 601
221 0.279 592
222 0.275 583
223 0.272 574
224 0.268 566
225 0.264 557

(For SPT)

56

Table 36 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

TEMP

(C)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 4.762 200,510
–31 4.748 188,340
–30 4.733 177,000
–29 4.716 166,342
–28 4.700 156,404
–27 4.682 147,134
–26 4.663 138,482
–25 4.644 130,402
–24 4.624 122,807
–23 4.602 115,710
–22 4.580 109,075
–21 4.557 102,868
–20 4.533 97,060
–19 4.508 91,588
–18 4.482 86,463
–17 4.455 81,662
–16 4.426 77,162
–15 4.397 72,940
–14 4.367 68,957
–13 4.335 65,219
–12 4.303 61,711
–11 4.269 58,415
–10 4.235 55,319

–9 4.199 52,392
–8 4.162 49,640
–7 4.124 47,052
–6 4.085 44,617
–5 4.044 42,324
–4 4.003 40,153
–3 3.961 38,109
–2 3.917 36,182
–1 3.873 34,367

0 3.828 32,654
1 3.781 31,030
2 3.734 29,498
3 3.686 28,052
4 3.637 26,686
5 3.587 25,396
6 3.537 24,171
7 3.485 23,013
8 3.433 21,918

9 3.381 20,883
10 3.328 19,903
11 3.274 18,972
12 3.220 18,090
13 3.165 17,255
14 3.111 16,464

TEMP

(C)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 3.056 15,714
16 3.000 15,000
17 2.944 14,323
18 2.889 13,681
19 2.833 13,071
20 2.777 12,493
21 2.721 11,942
22 2.666 11,418
23 2.610 10,921
24 2.555 10,449
25 2.500 10,000
26 2.445 9,571
27 2.391 9,164
28 2.337 8,776
29 2.284 8,407
30 2.231 8,056
31 2.178 7,720
32 2.127 7,401
33 2.075 7,096
34 2.025 6,806
35 1.975 6,530
36 1.926 6,266
37 1.878 6,014
38 1.830 5,774
39 1.784 5,546
40 1.738 5,327
41 1.692 5,117
42 1.648 4,918
43 1.605 4,727
44 1.562 4,544
45 1.521 4,370
46 1.480 4,203
47 1.439 4,042
48 1.400 3,889
49 1.362 3,743
50 1.324 3,603
51 1.288 3,469
52 1.252 3,340
53 1.217 3,217
54 1.183 3,099
55 1.150 2,986
56 1.117 2,878
57 1.086 2,774
58 1.055 2,675
59 1.025 2,579
60 0.996 2,488
61 0.968 2,400

TEMP

(C)

VO LTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.940 2,315
63 0.913 2,235
64 0.887 2,157
65 0.862 2,083
66 0.837 2,011
67 0.813 1,943
68 0.790 1,876
69 0.767 1,813
70 0.745 1,752
71 0.724 1,693
72 0.703 1,637
73 0.683 1,582
74 0.663 1,530
75 0.645 1,480
76 0.626 1,431
77 0.608 1,385
78 0.591 1,340
79 0.574 1,297
80 0.558 1,255
81 0.542 1,215
82 0.527 1,177
83 0.512 1,140
84 0.497 1,104
85 0.483 1,070
86 0.470 1,037
87 0.457 1,005
88 0.444 974
89 0.431 944
90 0.419 915
91 0.408 889
92 0.396 861
93 0.386 836
94 0.375 811
95 0.365 787
96 0.355 764
97 0.345 742
98 0.336 721

99 0.327 700
100 0.318 680
101 0.310 661
102 0.302 643
103 0.294 626
104 0.287 609
105 0.279 592
106 0.272 576
107 0.265 561

(For SPT)

TEMP

(C)

-40 -40 2,889,600

-35 -31 2,087,220

-30 -22 1,522,200

-25 -13 1,121,440

-20 -4 834,720

-15 5 627,280

-10 14 475,740

-5 23 363,990
0 32 280,820
5 41 218,410

10 50 171,170
15 59 135,140
20 68 107,440
25 77 86,000
30 86 69,280
35 95 56,160
40 104 45,810
45 113 37,580
50 122 30,990
55 131 25,680
60 140 21,400
70 158 15,070

TEMP

(F)

Table 37 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

75 167 12,730
80 176 10,790
85 185 9,200
90 194 7,870
95 203 6,770
100 212 5,850
105 221 5,090
110 230 4,450
115 239 3,870
120 248 3,350
125 257 2,920
130 266 2,580
135 275 2,280
140 284 2,020
145 293 1,800
150 302 1,590
155 311 1,390
160 320 1,250
165 329 1,120
170 338 1,010
175 347 920
180 356 830

57

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

LOW SOUND FAN — A shroud and a wire guard provide

26

25

24

23

22

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

3

1

3

1

3

1

6

2

4

2

4

2

12

11

21

20

19

18

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

5

4

3

2

1

4

2

1

3

5

J8

BLK

RED

LVT

4

3

22

23

T-55
ACCSY

SEN

OAT

BLU

BLU

BLK

RED

RGTB

BLK

RED

RGTA

SPTB

-

+

DPTB

-

+

A

C

B

A

C

B

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

SPTA

-

+

DPTA

-

+

A

C

B

A

C

B

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR ENTERING
FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR LEAVING
FLUID TEMP

SPACE TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORY OR
DUAL CHILLER LWT

J12 T55

Fig. 29 — Thermistor Connections to

Main Base Board, J8 Connector

LEGEND

ACCSY — Accessory
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature Sensor
LV T — Low Voltage Terminal
OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor
RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor
SEN — Sensor Terminal Block
SPT — Space Temperature Sensor

a30-4975

Fig. 30 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

a30-499

Fig. 31 — Mounted Fan Position

a30-4976

protection from the rotating fan. The exposed end of the fan
motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor
must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re­grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. The fan motor has a
step in the motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be
positioned such that it is securely seated on this step. Tighten
the bolt to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1.3 N·m).

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counter­clockwise when viewed from above). If necessary, switch
any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

Motormaster® V Controller — The Motormaster V

controller is standard on size 010 and 015 units. For other sizes,
the optional or accessory Motormaster V controller uses an in­put signal from the AUX board. See Fig. 32. The controller is
factory configured and requires no field programming. If a situ­ation arises where the drive does not function properly, the in­formation provided below and in Table 38 can be used to trou­bleshoot the drive.

WARNING

Hazard of electrical shock. Wait three minutes after discon­necting incoming power before servicing drive. Capacitors
retain charge after power is removed. Drive assembly
includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. Use
extreme caution when servicing the drive. Failure to com­ply could result in possible personal injury.

WARNING

When configured as shown in this literature, this equip­ment is designed to start when it receives line power.
Ensure that all personnel are clear of fans and guards are
installed before applying power. Failure to comply could
result in possible personal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals
T1, T2, and T3. Severe damage to the drive will result. Do
not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than
once every two minutes. Damage to the drive will result.

CAUTION

If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period
of time exceeding three years (due to storage, etc.), the
electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change
internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can
result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is
operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. In
order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for
operation after a long period of inactivity, apply input
power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the motor. Before attempting to operate the drive, motor,
and driven equipment, be sure all procedures pertaining to
installation and wiring have been properly followed. Fail­ure to comply could result in equipment damage.

GENERAL OPERATION — The speed varies in proportion
to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ con­trols. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz.

The ComfortLink controls must be configured for MMV
operation in order for it to operate. This is configured under the
Configuration menu (Configuration

58

MM

MMR.S) and

selecting “YES”. This configuration menu also contains the
gains and minimum speed for the Motormaster control logic.

CONFIGURATION — The MMV is configured for 1 of 12
operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal
block. The 30RAP units use operating modes 5-8. In these con­figurations, the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference
signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (-). One additional
jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz opera­tion and input voltage. See Table 39 for proper inputs. Once the
drive is powered, it will change to the mode selected according
to the inputs. See Fig. 33.

DRIVE PROGRAMMING

CAUTION

It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any
programming without consulting Carrier service personnel.
Unit damage may occur from improper programming.

To enter password and change program values:

1. Press Mode.

2. Upper right decimal point blinks.

3. Display reads “00”. To enter the PROGRAM mode to ac­cess the parameters, press the Mode button. This will ac-
tivate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not
been disabled). The display will read “00” and the upper
right-hand decimal point will be blinking. (See Fig. 33.)

4. Use the and buttons to scroll to the password
value (the factory default password is “1111”) and press
the Mode button. Once the correct password value is
entered, the display will read “P01”, which indicates that
the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning
of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter).

NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”, the password was incorrect,
and the process to enter the password must be repeated.

5. Press Mode to display present parameter number.
Upper right decimal point blinks.

Use the and buttons to scroll to the desired
parameter number.

Once the desired parameter number is found, press the
Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The up­per right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indicating
that the present parameter setting is being displayed, and that it
can be changed by using the up and down buttons. Use
and to change setting. Press Mode to store new setting.

Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit
the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the
Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the param­eter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last
viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode key is pressed
within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the pass­word is not required to access the parameters. After two min­utes, the password must be entered in order to access the pa­rameters again.

To change password: first enter the current password then
change parameter P44 to the desired password.

To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed
control mode:

1. Change P05 to ‘01- keypad’.

2. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed.

3. Set P05 to ‘04 - 4-20mA control’ to restore 4 to 20 mA
control.

EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming mod­ule (EPM) chip to store the program parameters. This is an
EEPROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the

VFD. It should not be removed with power applied to the
VFD.

LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS — Carrier Comfort
Network

®

(CCN) communications with external control
systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise gen­erated by the Motormaster V control. Ensure unit is well
grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication
lines.

If communications are lost only while Motormaster V con­trol is in operation, order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2)
and power supplies (CEAS221045-01, 2 required) for the CCN
communication line.

Fault Codes

— The drive is programmed to automatically re­start after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a
fault (the drive will not restart after CF, cF, GF, F1, F2-F9, or
Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful, the
drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC), which requires a
manual reset.

Manual Reset

— If fault condition has been removed, cycle

power to the chiller to reset the VFD.
Troubleshooting

— Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V
control requires a combination of observing system operation
and VFD information. The drive provides 2 kinds of trouble­shooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display
(P57, P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs.
The collective group is displayed through parameters
50-60 and all values are read-only.

• P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults

• P51: SOFTWARE version

• P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal.

Usually rated input voltage x 1.4

• P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output

voltage

• P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current

rating

• P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input:

100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v

• P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input.

20% = 4 mA, 100% = 20 mA

Manual Starter Trip

— If the VFD manual starter (MS-FC­HS, MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips,
locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per
motor) and verify their resistance. For units operating at 208 v
or 230 v, these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.
For all other voltages, they should measure approximately
20 ohms. Check value with mating plug disconnected, power
to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately
after stopping VFD). These are standard resistances at 77 F
(25 C). Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and
increase at lower temperatures.

REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The Comfort-

™

Link

replacement modules are shown in Table 40. If the main
base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configura­tion data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and
verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2
are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or op­tions (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well
as any specific time and maintenance schedules.

Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chillers
(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder.
This information is needed later in this procedure. If the check­list does not exist, fill out the current information in the Config­uration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and
configurations as needed for this particular installation.

59

Fig. 32 — Typical Motormaster Wiring

CONFIGURATION TABLE

*208-v can run in mode 5 or 6.

MODE NOMINAL VOLTAGE Hz

CONTROL INPUT

(PINS 25, 2)

START JUMPER

5 208/230/460/575* 60 External control 4-20 mA TB1-TB2
6 208/380 60 External control 4-20 mA TB13A-TB2

LEGEND

AUX — Auxiliary
FB — Fuse Block
MM — Motormaster
OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor
TB — Terminal Block

a30-4977

L1

L2

L3

Mode

DANGER

T1

T2

T3

B+

B-

DISPLAY

BUTTONS

Mode

MMV
TERMINAL
BLOCK

EPM

Fig. 33 — Motormaster® V Mode Buttons and Mode Display

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

FC2

11 21

12

13 23

BLK

YEL

MM-A

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

YEL

2

*1

VIO

240 1/4W

25

2

22

CHC

42

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(380,460,575V)

CHC

86

~~

MMR

11 14

RED

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

~

~

BLK

WHT

BLK

1

2

3

FROM
AUX-J4

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

1

2

3

~

1

3

COOLER/PUMP
HEATERS
(208/230,230V)

2

OFM1

GRN/YEL

VOLTAGE

208/230/460/575

380

OFM2

GRN/YEL

BLK

BLK

~

WHT

ZHBT

061

06A31

1

2

3

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

11

12

13

HIGH SCCR
ONLY

FB1

11

21

22

23

BLK

YEL

BLU

21

BLK

22

12

13

YEL

23

BLU

FB2

11

21

BLK

YEL

BLU

12

13

BLK

22

YEL

23

BLU

60

Table 38 — Fault Codes

FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION SOLUTION

AF High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high;

CF Control Fault: A blank EPM, or an EPM with corrupted data

cF Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parame-

CL CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the

GF Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are

HF High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high; Decel-

JF Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicating

LF Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately
OF Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground

PF Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the applica-

SF Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been

F1 EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.
F2-F9, Fo Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem Consult factory
Drive display = 60.0 even though it

is cold outside and it should be run­ning slower

Drive display = ‘---’ even though
drive should be running

Drive display = 8.0 even though fan
should be running faster

VFD flashes 57 and LCS Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 Hz

Cooling fan has failed (if equipped).

has been installed.

ter version has been installed.

CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is
reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current.
If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can trip
into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).

corrupted.

eration rate is too fast; Overhauling load.

that the serial link has been lost.

short circuit on the output; Failed output transistor; Boost
settings are too high; Acceleration rate is too fast.

tion; Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.

applied to a three-phase drive.

Feedback signal is above set point Check for proper set point

Start jumper is missing Replace start jumper. See section above

Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum
speed

until reset or loss of start command. Resetting requires
cycling start command (or power).

Check cooling fan operation

Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 —
PROGRAM SELECTION.

Either remove the EPM or perform a factory
reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter
version of the EPM to match the parameter
version of the drive.

Check for loose electrical connections.
Check for faulty condenser fan motor.
Check Parameter P25 from Table 39 is set
correctly.

Restore factory defaults P48, see section
above. If that does not work, replace EPM.

Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

Check serial connection (computer)
Check settings for PXX.
Check settings in communication software to
match PXX.

Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.
If unsuccessful, replace drive.

Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately
Check for dirty coils
Check for motor bearing failure

Check input power phasing

Check liquid line pressure

Check for proper set point
Check liquid line pressure

In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring
and feedback voltage. Feedback voltage dis­played on P-69. Pin 6 should be 5 v output.
Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere
between 0 and 5 v.

LEGEND

EPM — Electronic Programming Module
LCS — Lost Control Signal
OEM — Outside Equipment Manufacturer
VFD — Variable Frequency Drive

61

Table 39 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

P01 Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line 01 02 01 02
P02 Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz 01 01 01 01
P03 Startup mode: flying restart 06 06 06 06
P04 Stop mode: coast to stop 01 01 01 01

P05

P06 TB-14 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P08 TB-30 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P09 TB-31 Output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P10 TB-13A function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P11 TB-13B function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P12 TB-13C function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P13 TB-15 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01
P14 Control: 01 = Terminal strip 01 01 01 01
P15 Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer 02 02 02 02
P16 Units editing: 02 = whole units 02 02 02 02
P17 Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only 01 01 01 01
P19 Acceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10
P20 Deceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10
P21 DC brake time: 0 0 0 0 0
P22 DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0% 0 0 0 0
P23 Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm 8 8 8 8
P24 Max freq 60 60 50 50
P25 Current limit: (%) 125 110 125 110
P26 Motor overload: 100 100 100 100 100
P27 Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz 60 60 50 50
P28 Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
P29 Accel boost: 0% 0 0 0 0
P30 Slip compensation: 0% 0 0 0 0
P31 Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal 57 57 47 47
P32 Preset spd #2: 0 0 0 0 0
P33 Preset spd #3: 0 0 0 0 0

P34

P35

P36 Preset spd 6 default 0 0 0 0
P37 Preset spd 7 default 0 0 0 0
P38 Skip bandwidth 0 0 0 0
P39 Speed scaling 0 0 0 0
P40 Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz 60 60 50 50
P41 Load scaling: default (not used so NA) 200 200 200 200
P42 Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA) 60 60 60 60
P43 Serial address 1 1 1 1
P44 Password:111 111 111 111 111

P45

P46

P47 Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear) 01 01 01 01
P48 Program selection: Program 1 – 12 05 06 07 08
P61 PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID 01 01 01 01
P62 Min feedback = 0 (0V *10) 0 0 0 0
P63 Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10) 50 50 50 50
P64 Proportional gain = 4% 4 4 4 4
P65 Integral gain = .2 .2 .2 .2 .2
P66 PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5 5 5 5 5
P67 Min alarm 0 0 0 0
P68 Max alarm 0 0 0 0

LEGEND

NA — Not Applicable
PID — Proportional Integral Derivative
TB — Terminal Block

Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,
04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22, 06=R134a

Preset spd 4 default — R22 set point.
TB12-2 open

Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point.
TB12-2 closed

Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID
mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA

Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used
when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA

MODE

5

04 04 04 04

18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0

12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6

8888

60 60 50 50

MODE

6

MODE

7

MODE

8

62

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut
off all power to this equipment during installation. There
may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon­nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work
is completed.

1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect
all wires from the defective module by unplugging its
connectors.

2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting
screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the
module from the control box. Save the screws later use.

3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switch­es (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the
defective module.

NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to
avoid electrostatic discharge.

4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new
module for return to Carrier.

5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a
Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.

6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator
replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the
LEN connector.

7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring
power.

8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch
is in the OFF position.

9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs
blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking
and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is
communicating correctly.

10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points
and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE
CONTACT switch to its previous position.

Table 40 — Replacement Modules

MODULE

Main Base

Board (MBB)

Scrolling
Marquee

Display
Energy

Management

Module

(EMM)

Navigator

Display

EXV 30GT515217 HK50AA026
AUX 32GB500442E N/A

REPLACEMENT

PART NO. (with

Software)

30RA502134 HK50AA029

HK50AA031 HK50AA030

30GT515218 HK50AA028

HK50AA033 N/A

REPLACEMENT PART

NO. (without Software)

Hydronic Package — If the unit is equipped with a

factory-installed hydronic package, consult the information be­low for proper maintenance and service. In addition to this
information, each factory-installed hydronic package is sup­plied with a packet of information supplied by the manufactur­er, Bell & Gossett. Carrier Corporation strongly recommends
that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation
of the chiller.

PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed
pumps in the 30RAP units are shipped with a single impeller
size available for that pump. The pump was selected based on
the flow and head requirements as provided to Carrier. It is not

uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was
anticipated at time of selection. In many cases, it may be desir­able to make some field modifications to obtain optimum
pump performance.

Before any pump modifications are made, it is recommend­ed that actual pump performance be verified and compared to
the applicable pump curve. See base unit installation instruc­tions. This can be done in a variety of ways:

1. If pump impeller diameter is known:
a. Connect a differential pressure gage across the

pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes.

b. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve.

2. If pump impeller diameter is not known:

If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size
is not known, it is necessary to determine which impeller
curve to read.

The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to
“dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure
across the pressure ports on the pump. “Dead-heading”
can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the dis­charge side of the pump.

NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “dead­headed”, centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RAP units)
can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. It is rec­ommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat
build-up in the pump.

Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition,
the head will correspond to the intersection of an impel­ler curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. The
correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the
measured head.

3. Once the impeller diameter is known, proceed as in

Step 1.

4. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential

pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter bal­ance valve calculator. (This information is also provided
in the installation instructions.) This method will not di­rectly measure pressure differential seen by the pump, but
can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement.

5. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-

minal block are secure.

6. For factory-installed hydronic system, verify that:

• All air has been purged from the system.

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

7. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not

providing sufficient flow.

8. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise

when viewed from motor end of pump.

PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING
— See applicable section in the Installation instructions.

RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable sec­tion in the Installation instructions.

CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett ser­vice instruction manual provided with the hydronic package.

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule —

lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions
may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often
than recommended.

Routine:
For machines with e-coat condenser coils:

• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and
industrial applications.

The fol-

63

• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.
Every month:

• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig­erant loss and presence of moisture.

Every 3 months (for all machines):

• Check refrigerant charge.

• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant
leaks, repair as necessary.

• Check chilled water flow switch operation.

• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.

• Check compressor oil level.

Every 12 months (for all machines):

• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than
± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

• Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if
necessary.

• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti­freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.

• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure
drop, replace as necessary.

• Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.

• Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they
are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all
components.

• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled
Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature)
which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if
necessary.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con­denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage
the coil.

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and
removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the
coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should
be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the
coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and
brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety
glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and
gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens­er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean­ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and
uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray
straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de­gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent
damage to air centers.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between
air centers and refrigerant tubes.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart —

ble causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown be­low and in Table 41. Refer to Fig. 3-7 for component arrange­ment and control wiring diagrams.

GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored,
restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.

UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS
OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediate­ly. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch
control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control
through remote contact closure.

CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN —
After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected,
reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling mar­quee as shown in Table 42.

OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — De­termine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit break­er(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is
complete.

COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when
cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to
satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.

THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an
open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace
EWT, LWT, or OAT as required. Unit restarts automatically,
but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the
scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42.

Possi-

CAUTION

If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of
the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause
before attempting another restart.

LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can
lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls
have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep
the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant
charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this
condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing
of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm
conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).

COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30RAP units with Com-
fortLink™ controls include a compressor protection board that
protects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board
senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor.

If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is
no current, then one of the following safeties or conditions
have turned the compressor off:

Compressor Overcurrent
line breaks or a motor protection device located in the com­pressor electrical box.

Compressor Short Circuit
compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection
has tripped.

Compressor Motor Over Temperature
break or over temperature switch has opened.

— All compressors have internal

— There will not be current if the

— The internal line-

64

High-Pressure Switch Trip

Fig. 34 — Advanced Scroll Temperature

Protection Label

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

Fig. 35 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Time After Compressor is Stopped*

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

0 102030405060708090

Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes)

Recommended Cooling Time

(Mi

nut

es)

*Times are approximate.
NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature,
and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times.

— The high pressure switch has
opened. Below are the factory settings for the fixed high pres­sure switch.

30RAP UNIT

SIZE

010-060 650 4482 500 3447

ASTP Protection Trip

CUTOUT CUT-IN

psig kPa psig kPa

— All non-digital Copeland compres­sors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protec­tion (ASTP). A label located above the terminal box identifies
models that contain this technology. See Fig. 34.

Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of inter­nal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll
compressor when the internal temperature reaches approxi­mately 300 F. At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk
valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which
stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance
while the motor continues to run. The longer the compressor
runs unloaded, the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk
resets. See Fig. 35 for approximate reset times.

To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped
and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor
will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to
90 minutes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will

reset automatically before the motor protector resets, which
may take up to 2 hours.

High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection

— Units
equipped with digital compressors have an additional thermis­tor located on the discharge line, If discharge temperature ex­ceeds 265 F (129.4 C), the digital compressor will be shut off.

Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunc­tions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If
the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor
reads ON, an alert is generated. This will indicate that a com­pressor contactor has failed closed. In this case, a special mode,
Compressor Stuck on Control, will be enabled and all other
compressors will be turned off. An alarm will then be enabled
to indicate that service is required. Outdoor fans will continue
to operate. The first outdoor fan stage is turned on immediately.
The other stages of fan will be turned on as required by SCT.

Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal

or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the
whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as
described in Table 42.

Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if
the condition corrects itself. The following method must be
used to reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the
alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the
LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press

and until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET
ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press .
The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying
PASS and WORD. Press to display the default pass­word, 1111. Press for each character. If the password
has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individu­al character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press .
The alarms will be reset.

65

Table 41 — Troubleshooting

SYMPTOMS CAUSE REMEDY

Cooler Circulating Pump Does
Not Run

Compressor Cycles
Off on Loss of Charge

Compressor Cycles Off on Cooler
Freeze Protection

Compressor Shuts Down on
High-Pressure Control

Unit Operates Too Long
or Continuously

Unusual or Loud System
Noises

Compressor Loses Oil Leak in system Repair leak.

Hot Liquid Line Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Repair leak and recharge.
Frosted Liquid Line Restricted filter drier Replace filter drier.
Frosted Suction Line Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a

Freeze-Up Improper charging Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler

Power line open Reset circuit breaker.
Control fuse or circuit breaker open Check control circuit for ground or short. Reset breaker and

Tripped power breaker Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset breaker.
Loose terminal connection Check connections.
Improperly wired controls Check wiring and rewire if necessary.
Low line voltage Check line voltage — determine location of

Pump motor defective Check motor winding for open or short.

Pump seized Replace pump.
Low refrigerant charge Repair leak and recharge.

Thermistor failure Replace thermistor.
System load was reduced faster than controller could

remove stages
High-pressure control acting erratically Replace control.
Noncondensables in system Evacuate and recharge.
Condenser dirty Clean condenser.
Fans not operating Repair or replace if defective.
System overcharged with refrigerant Reduce charge.
Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant.
Control contacts fused Replace control.
Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Clean or replace as needed.
Defective insulation Replace or repair as needed.
Damaged compressor Check compressor and replace if necessary.
Piping vibration Support piping as required.

Compressor noisy Replace compressor (worn bearings).

Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Replace compressor.
Oil trapped in line Check piping for oil traps.

normal condition for brine applications)
Stuck EXV Replace valve if defective.

System not drained for winter shutdown Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate gly-

Loose Thermistor Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.

replace fuse.

voltage drop and remedy deficiency.

Replace compressor if necessary.

Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the
control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load.

Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor

Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.

Replace valve if defective.

while charging, and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or
greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C).

col mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing.

66

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

OR

ALERT

T051 Alert

A051 Alarm

T052 Alert

A052 Alarm

T055 Alert

A055 Alarm

T056 Alert

A056 Alarm

A060 Alarm

A061 Alarm

T068 None Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure

T069 None Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure

T073 Alert

T074 Alert

T077 Alert

T078 Alert

T079 Alert

T090 Alert

T091 Alert

T092 Alert

T093 Alert

T094 Alert

Circuit A, Compressor 1
Fail ure

Circuit A, Compressor 1
Fail ure

Circuit A, Compressor 2
Fail ure

Circuit A, Compressor 2
Fail ure

Circuit B, Compressor 1
Fail ure

Circuit B, Compressor 1
Fail ure

Circuit B, Compressor 2
Fail ure

Circuit B, Compressor 2
Fail ure

Cooler Leaving Fluid
Thermistor Failure

Cooler Entering Fluid
Thermistor Failure

Outside Air Thermistor
Fail ure

Space Temperature/Dual Chiller
Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Saturated
Suction Temperature
exceeds Cooler Leaving
Fluid Temperature

Circuit B Saturated
Suction Temperature
exceeds Cooler Leaving
Fluid Temperature

Lead/Lag LWT
Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Discharge
Pressure Transducer Failure

Circuit B Discharge
Pressure Transducer Failure

Circuit A Suction
Pressure Transducer Failure

Circuit B Suction
Pressure Transducer
Fail ure

Discharge Gas
Thermistor Failure

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Compressor feedback signal
does not match relay state

Respective current sensor
board (CSB) feedback signal
is ON when the compressor
should be off

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

If return gas sensors are
enabled (RG.EN) and
thermistor is outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

If return gas sensors are
enabled (RG.EN) and
thermistor is outside range of
–40 to 245 F –40 to 118 C)

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Faulty expansion valve,
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid thermistor.

Faulty expansion valve,
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid thermistor.

Thermistor outside range of
–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Outside of range (0 to
667 psig)

Outside of range (0 to
667 psig)

Outside of range (0 to 420
psig)

Outside of range (0 to
420 psig)

Discharge thermistor (DTT) is
either open or shorted

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Compressor A1 shut
down.

Unit shut down Manual

Compressor A2 shut
down.

Unit shut down Manual

Compressor B1 shut
down.

Unit shut down Manual

Compressor B2 shut
down.

Unit shut down Manual

Chiller shut down
immediately

Chiller shut down
immediately

Circuit A shut down Automatic

Circuit B shut down Automatic

Temperature reset
disabled. Chiller runs
under normal control/set
points. When capacity
reaches 0, cooler/pump
heaters are energized.

Temperature reset
disabled. Chiller runs
under normal control/set
points.

Circuit A shutdown after
pumpdown complete.

Circuit B shutdown after
pumpdown complete

Chiller runs as a stand
alone machine

Circuit A shut down Automatic

Circuit B shut down Automatic

Circuit A shut down Automatic

Circuit B shut down Automatic

Digital compressor shut
down.

RESET

METHOD

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

PROBABLE

CAUSE

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, non­condensables, operation
beyond capability.

Welded compressor contac­tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, non­condensables, operation
beyond capability.

Welded compressor contac­tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, non­condensables, operation
beyond capability.

Welded compressor contac­tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,
faulty CSB, loss of condenser
air, filter drier plugged, non­condensables, operation
beyond capability.

Welded compressor contac­tor, CSB wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

Faulty expansion valve or
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid
thermistor.

Faulty expansion valve or
suction pressure transducer
or leaving fluid
thermistor.

Dual LWT thermistor failure,
damaged cable/wire or
wiring error.

Transducer failure, poor
connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

Transducer failure, poor
connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

Transducer failure, poor
connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

Transducer failure, poor
connection to MBB, or wiring
damage/error.

Thermistor failure, damaged
cable/wire or wiring error.

67

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

T110 Alert Circuit A Loss of Charge

T111 Alert Circuit B Loss of Charge

T112 Alert

T113 Alert

T114 Alert

T115 Alert

T116 Alert

T117 Alert

T118 Alert

A118 Alarm

T126 Alert

T127 Alert

T133 Alert

T134 Alert

A140 Alert

A150 Alarm Emergency Stop

A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration

A152 Alarm

ALARM

OR

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

Circuit A High Saturated
Suction Temperature

Circuit B High Saturated
Suction Temperature

Circuit A Low Suction
Superheat

Circuit B Low Suction
Superheat

Circuit A Low Cooler
Suction Temperature

Circuit B Low Cooler
Suction Temperature

High Discharge Gas
Temperature Alert

High Discharge Gas
Temperature

Circuit A High
Discharge Pressure

Circuit B High
Discharge Pressure

Circuit A Low Suction
Pressure

Circuit B Low Suction
Pressure

Reverse Rotation
Detected

Unit Down Due to
Failure

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

If the compressors are off
and discharge pressure
reading is < 26 psig for
30 sec.

If the compressors are off
and discharge pressure
reading is < 26 psig for
30 sec.

Circuit saturated suction
temperature pressure
transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)
for 5 minutes

Circuit saturated suction
temperature pressure
transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)
for 5 minutes

Suction superheat is
less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5
minutes.

Suction superheat is
less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5
minutes.

Mode 7 caused the com­pressor to unload 6 consecu­tive times with less than a
30-minute interval between
each circuit shutdown.

Mode 8 caused the com­pressor to unload 6 consecu­tive times with less than a
30-minute interval between
each circuit shutdown.

Discharge Thermistor (DTT)
reading is greater than 250 F

3 Discharge Gas Tempera­ture alarms occur within a
day

Compressor operation out­side of operating envelope.

Compressor operation out­side of operating envelope.

Suction pressure below
34 psig for 8 seconds or
below 23 psig

Suction pressure below
34 psig for 8 seconds or
below 23 psig

Incoming chiller power leads
not phased correctly

CCN emergency stop
command received

One or more illegal
configurations exists.

Both circuits are down due
to alarms/alerts.

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit not allowed to
start.

Circuit not allowed to
start.

Circuit shut down Manual

Circuit shut down Manual

Circuit A shut down.

Circuit B shut down.

Circuit shut down Manual

Circuit shut down Manual

Compressor A1 shut
down

Compressor A1 shut
down

Circuit shut down

Circuit shut down

Circuit shut down

Circuit shut down

Chiller not allowed to
start.

Chiller shutdown
without going through
pumpdown.

Chiller is not allowed to
start.

Chiller is unable
to run.

RESET

METHOD

Manual

Manual

Automatic restart

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Automatic restart

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Autom atic

Manual

Automatic, only
after first 3 daily
occurrences.
Manual reset
thereafter. Read­ing from OAT sen­sor must drop 5 F
(2.8 C) before
restart

Automatic, only
after first 3 daily
occurrences. Man­ual reset thereafter.
Reading from OAT
sensor must drop
5 F (2.8 C) before
restart

Automatic
restart after first
daily occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

Automatic
restart after first
daily occurrence.
Manual restart
thereafter.

Manual

Automatic once
CCN command for
EMSTOP returns to
normal

Manual once
configuration errors
are corrected

Automatic once
alarms/alerts are
cleared that pre­vent the chiller from
starting.

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Refrigerant leak or
transducer failure

Refrigerant leak or
transducer failure

Faulty Expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer or high entering
fluid temperature.

Faulty Expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer or high entering
fluid temperature.

Faulty expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer, faulty suction gas
thermistor, circuit
overcharged

Faulty expansion valve,
faulty suction pressure
transducer, faulty suction
gas thermistor, circuit
overcharged

Faulty expansion valve, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, faulty suction
pressure transducer, low
cooler fluid flow

Faulty expansion valve, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, faulty suction
pressure transducer, low
cooler fluid flow

Refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, head pressure
control.

Refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier, head pressure
control.

Faulty transducer/high
pressure switch, low/
restricted condenser
airflow

Faulty transducer/high
pressure switch, low/
restricted condenser
airflow

Faulty or sticking EXV, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low
refrigerant charge, plugged
filter drier.

Reverse any two incoming
power leads to correct. Check
for correct fan rotation first.

CCN Network
command.

Configuration error.
Check unit settings.

Alarm notifies user
that chiller is 100%
down.

68

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

T153 Aler t

A154 Alarm

T155 Aler t

A156 Alarm

A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure

A172 Alarm

T173 Aler t

T174 Aler t

T175 Aler t

T176 Aler t

T177 Aler t

A189 Alarm

T190 Aler t

T191 Aler t

T192 Aler t

T193 Aler t

T194 Aler t

T195 Aler t

T196 Aler t

ALARM

OR

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

Real Time Clock
Hardware Failure

Serial EEPROM
Hardware Failure

Serial EEPROM
Storage Failure

Critical Serial EEPROM
Storage Failure

Loss of Communication
with EXV Board

Loss of Communication
with EMM

4 to 20 mA Cooling Set
Point Input Failure

Loss of Communication
with the AUX Board

4 to 20 mA
Temperature Reset
Input Failure

4 to 20 mA Demand
Limit Input Failure

Cooler Pump Auxiliary
Contact Inputs Miswired

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Cooler Pump 1 Failed
to Provide Flow at
Start-Up

Cooler Pump 2 Failed
to Provide Flow at
Start-Up

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Flow Lost While Pump 1
Running

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Internal clock on MBB fails

Hardware failure with MBB

Configuration/storage
failure with MBB

Configuration/storage
failure with MBB

Hardware failure with
peripheral device

MBB loses communication
with EXV board

MBB loses communication
with EMM

If configured with EMM and
input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

MBB loses communication
with AUX Board.

If configured with EMM
and input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

If configured with EMM and
input less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
are closed when Pump 2
output is energized or if
Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
are closed when Pump 1
output is energized.

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
did not close within
26 seconds after pump
was started

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
did not close within
26 seconds after pump
was started

Pump 1 did not provide
flow to close flow switch
within 60 seconds

Pump 2 did not provide
flow to close flow switch
within 60 seconds

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
open for 26 seconds after
initially made. All
compressors shut down.
Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
open for 26 seconds after
initially made. All
compressors shut down.
Pump 2 turned off.

Cooler flow switch contacts
open for 3 seconds after
initially made

ACTI ON TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Occupancy schedule
will not be used. Chiller
defaults to Local On
mode.

Chiller is unable
to run.

No Action Manual

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

Chiller is not allowed
to run.

4 to 20 mA
temperature reset
disabled. Demand
Limit set to 100%. 4 to
20 mA set point
disabled.

Set point function
disabled. Chiller
controls to CSP1.

Reset function
disabled. Chiller
returns to normal set
point control.

Demand limit function
disabled. Chiller
returns to 100%
demand limit
control.

Both pump outputs
are turned off.

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Pump 2 turned off.
Pump 1 will be started
if available.

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Pump 1 turned off.
Pump 2 will be started
if available.

Pump 2 will be started
if available. Chiller
allowed to run if
Pump 2 successfully
starts.

Pump 1 will be started
if available. Chiller
allowed to run if
Pump 1 successfully
starts.

All compressors
shut down. Pump 1
turned off. Pump 2 will
be started if available.
Chiller allowed to run if
Pump 2 successfully
starts and flow switch
is closed.

RESET

METHOD

Automatic when
correct clock control
restarts.

Manual

Manual

Manual

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Time/Date/Month/
Day/Year not
properly set.

Main Base Board
failure.

Potential failure of
MBB. Download
current operating
software. Replace
MBB if error occurs
again.

Main Base Board
failure.

Main Base Board
failure.

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
EXV board.

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
Energy Manage­ment Module (EMM).

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Wiring error, faulty
wiring or failed
AUX board.

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Faulty signal
generator, wiring
error, or faulty EMM.

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
auxiliary contacts.

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Wiring error, faulty
contacts on pump
contactor

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

69

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

T197 Aler t

T198 Aler t

T199 Aler t

T200 Aler t

A201 Alarm

A202 Alarm

T203 Aler t

T204 Aler t

T205 Aler t

T206 Aler t

A207 Alarm

A208 Alarm

T300 Aler t

T301 Aler t

ALARM

ALERT

OR

DESCRIPTION

Flow Lost While Pump 2
Running

Cooler Pump 1 Aux
Contacts Closed While
Pump Off

Cooler Pump 2 Aux
Contacts Closed While
Pump Off

Cooler Flow/Interlock
Contacts Failed to Close
at Start-Up

Cooler Flow/Interlock
Contacts Opened
During Normal
Operation

Cooler Pump Interlock
Closed When Pump is
Off

Loss of Communication
with Slave Chiller

Loss of Communication
with Master Chiller

Master and Slave Chiller
with Same Address

High Leaving Chilled
Water Temperature

Cooler Freeze
Protection

EWT or LWT
Thermistor failure

Cooler Pump 1
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

Cooler Pump 2
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Cooler flow switch contacts
open for 3 seconds after
initially made

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts
closed for 26 seconds
when pump state is off

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts
closed for 26 seconds
when pump state is off

Cooler flow switch contacts
failed to close within
1 minute (if cooler pump
control is enabled) or
within 5 minutes (if cooler
pump control is not
enabled) after start-up

Flow switch opens for at
least 3 seconds after
being initially closed

If configured for cooler
pump control and flow
switch input is closed for
5 minutes while pump
output(s) are off

Master chiller MBB
loses communication
with slave chiller MBB

Slave chiller MBB loses
communication with
master chiller MBB

Master and slave chiller
have the same CCN
address (CCN.A)

LWT read is greater than
LCW Alert Limit, Total
capacity is 100% and LWT
is greater than LWT
reading one minute ago

Cooler EWT or LWT is less
than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)

Cooler EWT is less than
LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for
1 minute after a circuit is
started

Pump 1 Service
Countdown (P.1.DN)
expired. Complete pump 1
maintenance and enter
'YES' for Pump 1
Maintenance Done
(P.1.MN) item.

Pump 2 Service
Countdown (P.2.DN)
expired. Complete pump 2
maintenance and
enter 'YES' for Pump 1
Maintenance Done
(P.2.MN) item.

ACTI ON TAKEN

BY CONTROL

All compressors shut
down. Pump 2 turned
off. Pump 1 will be
started if available.
Chiller allowed to run if
Pump 1 successfully
starts and flow switch
is closed.

Chiller not allowed to
start

Chiller not allowed to
start

Chiller not allowed to
start. For models with
dual pumps, the
second pump will be
started if available

All compressors shut
down. For models with
dual pumps, the
second pump will be
started if available

Chiller shut down

Dual chiller control
disabled. Chiller runs
as a stand-alone
machine.

Dual chiller control
disabled. Chiller runs
as a stand-alone
machine

Dual chiller routine
disabled. Master/slave
run as stand-alone
chillers.

Alert only. No action
taken.

Chiller shutdown
without going through
pumpdown. Cooler
pump continues to
run a minimum of
5 minutes (if control
enabled).

Chiller shutdown.
Cooler pump shut off
(if control enabled).

None Automatic

None Automatic

RESET

METHOD

Manual

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Manual

Manual

Automatic when
aux contacts open

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Both EWT and LWT
must be at least 6 F
(3.3 C) above Brine
Freeze point
(BR.FZ).
Automatic for first,
Manual reset thereaf­ter.

Manual

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

Wiring error, pump
circuit breaker
tripped, contactor
failure, faulty flow
switch or interlock

Cooler pump failure,
faulty flow switch or
interlock, pump
circuit breaker
tripped

Wiring error, faulty
pump contactor
(welded contacts)

Wiring error, faulty
wiring, failed Slave
chiller MBB module,
power loss at slave
chiller, wrong slave
address.

Wiring error, faulty
wiring, failed master
chiller MBB module,
power loss at Master
chiller.

CCN Address for
both chillers is the
same. Must be
different. Check
CCN.A under the
OPT2 sub-mode in
Configuration at both
chillers.

Building load greater
than unit capacity,
low water/brine flow
or compressor fault.
Check for other
alarms/alerts.

Faulty thermistor,
low water flow.

Faulty cooler pump,
low water flow,
plugged fluid
strainer.

Routine pump
maintenance
required

Routine pump
maintenance
required

70

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

T302 Alert

T303 Alert

T500 Alert

T501 Alert

T502 Alert

T503 Alert

T504 Alert

T505 Alert

T950 Alert Loss of Communication

T951 Alert Loss of Communication

T952 Alert Loss of Communication

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network
CSB — Current Sensor Board
EEPROM — Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMM — Energy Management Module
EWT — Entering Fluid Temperature
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
HSM — Hydronic System Manager
LCW — Leaving Chilled Water
LWT — Leaving Fluid Temperature
MBB — Main Base Board
OAT — Outdoor-Air Temperature
SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature
WSM — Water System Manager

ALARM

OR

ALERT

LEGEND FOR TABLE 42

DESCRIPTION

Strainer Blowdown
Scheduled
Maintenance Due

Condenser Coil
Maintenance Due

Current Sensor Board
A1 Failure

Current Sensor Board
A2 Failure

Current Sensor Board
A3 Failure

Current Sensor Board
B1 Failure

Current Sensor Board
B2 Failure

Current Sensor Board
B3 Failure

with Water System
Manager

with Chillervisor System
Manager

with Hydronic System
Manager

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

Strainer Service
Countdown (S.T.DN)
expired. Complete strainer
blowdown and enter 'YES'
for Strainer Maintenance
Done (S.T.MN) item.

Coil Service Countdown
(C.L.DN) expired.
Complete condenser coil
cleaning and enter 'YES'
for Coil Maintenance Done
(C.L.MN) item.

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

Alert occurs when CSB out­put is a constant high value

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

No communications have
been received by the MBB
within 5 minutes of last
transmission

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

None Automatic

None Automatic

Compressor A1 shut
down

Compressor A2 shut
down

Compressor A3 shut
down

Compressor B1 shut
down

Compressor B2 shut
down

Compressor B3 shut
down

WSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

CSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

HSM forces removed.
Chiller runs under own
control

RESET

METHOD

Autom atic

Autom atic

Autom atic

Autom atic

Autom atic

Autom atic

Automatic Failed module, wiring

Automatic Failed module, wiring

Automatic Failed module, wiring

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Routine strainer
maintenance
required

Routine condenser
coil maintenance
required

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

CSB failure.
Wiring error.

error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

error, failed
transformer, loose
connection plug,
wrong address

COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS
T051, T052 (Circuit A Compresser Failures)
T055, T056 (Circuit B Compressor Failures) — Alert codes

051, 052, 055, and 056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and
B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor
(CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor op­eration. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor

relay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Compressor Overload

— Either the compressor internal over­load protector is open or the external overload protector (Kri­wan module) has activated. The external overload protector
modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box.
Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor wind­ings are the inputs to the module. The module is powered with
24 vac from the units main control box. The module output is a
normally closed contact that is wired in series with the com­pressor contactor coil. In a compressor motor overload condi­tion, contact opens, deenergizing the compressor contactor.

Low Refrigerant Charge

— If the compressor operates for an
extended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the com­pressor ASTP device will open, which will cause the compres­sor to trip on its overload protection device.

Circuit Breaker Trip

— The compressors are protected from

short circuit by a breaker in the control box.
Wiring Error

— A wiring error might not allow the compres-

sor to start.

To check out alerts T051-T056:

1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test
mode. If the compressor does not start, then most likely
the problem is one of the following: HPS open, open in­ternal protection, circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wir­ing, or incorrect compressor wiring.

2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the cor­rect direction.

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction
can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be veri­fied by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure
rise on start-up.

71

IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify
that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check
the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor
is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and
replace if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe com­pressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor
is working and condenser fans are energized.

COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS
Circuit A A051, A052
Circuit B A055, A056 — Alarm codes 051, 052, 055, and

056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and B2. These alarms oc­cur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should
be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor
relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous
seconds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only moni­tored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has
been commanded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service tech­nician forcing a relay to test a compressor.

In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the cur­rent sensor board reports the compressor and the request off,
certain diagnostics will take place as follows:

1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and
the current sensor board is on and the request is off, the
control will command the condenser fans to maintain
normal head pressure.

2. The control will shut-off all other compressors.
The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen

compressor relay on the MBB.

To check out alarms A051-A056:

1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors
should be off.

2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there
is 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.

3. Check for welded contactor.

4. Verify CSB wiring.

5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor opera­tion to verify that compressor current sensor is working
and condenser fans are energized.

A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure)
sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to
118 C) then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usu­ally a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by
a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor
will shut down the entire unit.

A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure)
reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to116 C) then
the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty
thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er­ror, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut
down the entire unit.

T068, T69 (Circuit A,B Compressor Return Gas Tempera­ture Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the com­pressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of
–40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will shut
down the appropriate circuit.

T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure)
alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside
the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this therm­istor will disable any elements of the control which requires its
use.

T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure)
occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range

— The

— If the sensor

— This

— This alert

of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). Failure of this thermistor will
disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The
cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55, or
T58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er­ror, or a loose connection.

T090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure)
T091 (Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) —

Alert codes 090 and 091 are for circuits A and B respectively.
These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0
to 667.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use
the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose
connection.

T092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)
T093 (Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure) —

Alert codes 092 and 093 are for circuits A and B respectively.
These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0
to 420.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use
the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose
connection.

T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure)
curs for units which have the digital compressor installed on
circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the
circuit will be shutoff. The alert will reset itself when discharge
temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C). The cause of the alert
is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.

T110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge)
T111 (Circuit B Loss of Charge) — Alert codes 110 and 111

are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur when
the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than
26 psig.

T112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature)
T113 (Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature) —

Alert codes 112 and 113 occur when compressors in a circuit
have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturat­ed suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21.1 C). The high
saturated suction alert is generated and the circuit is shut down.

T114 (Circuit A Low Superheat)
T115 (Circuit B Low Superheat) — Alert codes 114 and 115
occur when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for
5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alert is generated and
the circuit is shut down.

T116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature)
T117 (Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature) — Alert

codes 116 and 117 are for circuits A and B respectively. These
alerts are generated if the capacity stages are reduced three
times without a 30 minute interval between capacity reductions
due to operating mode 7 or mode 8.

T118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert)
A118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alarm) — This

alert or alarm occurs for units which have the digital compres­sor installed on circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is great­er than 268 F (131.1 C), the circuit will be shut off. The alert
will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F
(121.1 C). If this alert occurs 3 times within a day, the A118
alarm will be generated and the alarm must be reset manually.
The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a
faulty thermistor.

T126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure)
T127 (Circuit B High Head Pressure) — Alert codes 126 and

127 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur
when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is
greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 14. Prior to
the alert, the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit
if that circuit's saturated condensing temperature is greater than
the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2.7° C). If SCT continues to

— This alert oc-

72

rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alert will occur and
the circuit's remaining compressor will shut down. The cause
of the alarm is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor
ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged
filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.

T133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure)
T134 (Circuit B Low Suction Pressure) — Alert codes 133

and 134 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts are
generated if one of the two following conditions is satisfied:
the circuit suction pressure is below 34 psig (234.4 kPa) for 8
seconds, or the suction pressure is below 23 psig (158.6 kPa).
The cause of this alert may be low refrigerant charge, plugged
liquid line filter drier, or sticking EXV. Check head pressure
operation. If not equipped, consider adding low ambient tem­perature head pressure control.

Add wind baffles if required.

A140 (Reverse Rotation Detected)
power up, for suction pressure change on the first activated cir­cuit. The unit control determines failure as follows:

1. The suction pressure of both circuits is sampled 5 seconds
before the compressor is brought on, right when the com­pressor is brought on and 5 seconds afterwards.

2. The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds be­fore the compressor is brought on to when the compres­sor is brought on is calculated.

3. The rate of suction pressure change from when the
compressor is brought on to 5 seconds afterwards is
calculated.

4. With the above information, the test for reverse rotation is
made. If the suction pressure change 5 seconds after com­pression is greater than the suction pressure change 5 sec­onds before compression – 1.25, then there is a reverse
rotation error.

This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require

manual reset.
A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop)

stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit
will be immediately stopped.

If the CCN point name "EMSTOP" in the system table is set
to emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and
broadcast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is
down. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to
"enable."

A151 (Illegal Configuration)
invalid configuration has been entered. The following are ille­gal configurations.

• Invalid unit size has been entered.

• Dual thermostat configured for single-circuit unit.

• Dual thermostat and switch demand limit configure

• AUX board incorrect revision.

• Unit configuration set to invalid type.
A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure)

due to alerts and/or alarms. Reset is automatic when all alarms
are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity.

— A test is made once, on

— If the CCN emergency

— An A151 alarm indicates an

— Both circuits are off

T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure)
has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try re­setting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm
continues, the board should be replaced.

A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure)
has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try
resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm
continues, the board should be replaced.

T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error)
has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try
resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert
continues, the board should be replaced.

A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error)
problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the
MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If
the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

A157 (A/D Hardware Failure)
ed with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power
and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board
should be replaced.

A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board)
This alarm indicates that there are communications problems
with the EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.

T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Fail­ure) — This alert indicates that there are communications
problems with the energy management. All functions per­formed by the EMM will stop, which can include demand lim­it, reset and capacity input. The alarm will automatically reset.

T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure)
alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set
point 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA
or greater than 22 mA.

T175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board)
This alarm indicates that there are communications problems
with the AUX board. All functions performed by the AUX
board will stop, which can include digital scroll unloader oper­ation and low ambient head pressure control. The alarm will
automatically reset.

T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure)
cates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input.
The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.
The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.

T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure)
alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit
4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or
greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when
this occurs.

T500, T501 (Current Sensor Board Failure — A xx Circuit
A)

T503, T504 (Current Sensor Board Failure — B xx Circuit
B) — Alert codes 500, 501, 503, and 504 are for compressors
A1, A2, B1, and B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the
output of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset
automatically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must
be replaced.

— A problem has been detect-

— A problem

— A problem

— A problem

— A

—

— This

—

— This alert indi-

— This

73

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS

EWT xxx.x ºF Entering Fluid Temp

LWT xxx.x ºF Leaving Fluid Temp
SETP xxx.x ºF Active Set Point
CTPT xxx.x ºF Control Point

LOD.F xxx Load/Unload Factor

0=Service Test

1=Off Local
2=Off CCN
3=Off Time

4=Off Emrgcy

5=On Local
6=On CCN
7=On Time

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

VIEW

RUN

HOUR

STAT Control Mode

LD.PM Lead Pump

OCC YES/NO Occupied

LS.AC YES/NO Low Sound Active

MODE YES/NO Override Modes in Effect

CAP xxx Percent Total Capacity

STGE x Requested Stage
ALRM xxx Current Alarms & Alerts

TIME xx.xx Time of Day 00:00-23:59

MNTH xx Month of Year

DATE xx Day of Month 01-31

YEAR xx Year of Century

UNIT RUN HOUR AND START
HRS.U xxxx HRS Machine Operating Hours
STR.U xxxx Machine Starts
HR.P1 xxxx HRS Pump 1 Run Hours
HR.P2 xxxx HRS Pump 2 Run Hours

CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS
HRS.A xxxx HRS Circuit A Run Hours
HRS.B xxxx HRS Circuit B Run Hours
HR.A1 xxxx HRS Compressor A1 Run Hours
HR.A2 xxxx HRS Compressor A2 Run Hours
HR.B1 xxxx HRS Compressor B1 Run Hours
HR.B2 xxxx HRS Compressor B2 Run Hours

74

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

COMPRESSOR STARTS

ST.A1 xxxx Compressor A1 Starts

STRT

PM

VERS

ST.A2 xxxx Compressor A2 Starts
ST.B1 xxxx Compressor B1 Starts
ST.B2 xxxx Compressor B2 Starts

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

PUMP PUMP MAINTENANCE

SI.PM xxxx HRS Pump Service Interval
P.1.DN xxxx HRS Pump 1 Service Countdown
P.2.DN xxxx HRS Pump 2 Service Countdown
P.1.MN YES/NO Pump 1 Maintenance Done User Entry
P.2.MN YES/NO Pump 2 Maintenance Done User Entry

PMDT PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES
P.1.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.1.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.1.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.1.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.1.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.2.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.2.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.2.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.2.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
P.2.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE

SI.ST xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Interval

S.T.DN xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Countdown

S.T.MN YES/NO Strainer Maint. Done User Entry

ST.DT STRAINER MAINTENANCE DATES
S.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
S.T.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
S.T.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
S.T.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
S.T.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL COIL MAINTENANCE

SI.CL xxxx HRS Coil Cleaning Srvc Int
C.L.DN xxxx HRS Coil Service Countdown
C.L.MN YES/NO Coil Cleaning Maint.Done User Entry

CL.DT COIL MAINTENANCE DATES
C.L.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM
C.L.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

MBB CESR131460-XXXXX

EXV CESR131172-XXXXX

AUX1 CESR131333-XXXXX

EMM CESR131174-XXXXX

MARQ CESR131171-XXXXX

NAVI CESR130227-XXXXX

75

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

To enable Service Test mode, move

TEST Service Test Mode

OUTPUTS
EXV.A xxx% EXV % Open
EXV.B xxx% EXV % Open

FAN1 ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay
FAN2 ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay
FAN3 ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay
FAN4 ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay

OUTS

CMPA

CMPB

FAN5 ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay

FAN6 ON/OFF Fan 6 Relay
V.HPA xx Var Head Press %
V.HPB xx Var Head Press %

CLP.1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 1

CLP.2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 2

UL.TM xx Comp A1 Unload Time

CL.HT ON/OFF Cooler/Pump Heater

RMT.A ON/OFF Remote Alarm Relay

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST
CC.A1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay
UL.TM xx Comp A1 Unload Time
CC.A2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay

MLV ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST
CC.B1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay
CC.B2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay

Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to

OFF. Change TEST to ON.

Move switch to ENABLE

Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES

CEWT xxx.x °F Cooler Entering Fluid

UNIT

CIR.A

CIR.B

CLWT xxx.x °F Cooler Leaving Fluid

OAT xxx.x °F Outside Air Temperature
SPT xxx.x °F Space Temperature

DLWT xxx.x °F Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
SCT.A xxx.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp
SST.A xxx.x °F Saturated Suction Temp
RGT.A xxx.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp

D.GAS xxx.x °F Discharge Gas Temp

SH.A xxx.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B
SCT.B xxx.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp
SST.B xxx.x °F Saturated Suction Temp
RGT.B xxx.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp

SH.B xxx.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

PRC.A

PRC.B

DP.A xxx.x PSIG Discharge Pressure
SP.A xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure

PRESSURES CIRCUIT B
DP.B xxx.x PSIG Discharge Pressure
SP.B xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure

76

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION RANGE COMMENT

COOLING SET POINTS

COOL

HEAD

FRZ

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

GEN.I

CRCT

4-20

CSP.1 xxx.x °F Cooling Set Point 1 –20 to 70 Default: 44 F
CSP.2 xxx.x °F Cooling Set Point 2 –20 to 70 Default: 44 F
CSP.3 xxx.x °F ICE Set Point –20 to 32 Default: 32 F

HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS
H.DP xxx.x °F Head Set Point 85 to 120 Default: 95 F
F.ON xxx.x °F Fan On Set Point Default: 95 F

F.OFF xxx.x °F Fan Off Set Point Default: 72 F

B.OFF xx.x Base Fan Off Delta Temp 10 to 50 Default: 23 F

F.DLT xxx Fan Stage Delta 0 to 50 Default: 15 F

BRINE FREEZE SET POINT

BR.FZ xx.x °F Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34 Default: 34 F

Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

GENERAL INPUTS

STST ON/OFF Start/Stop Switch

FLOW ON/OFF Cooler Flow Switch
PM.F.1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump 1 Interlock
PM.F.2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

HT.RQ ON/OFF Heat Request

DLS1 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 1
DLS2 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 2
ICED ON/OFF Ice Done

DUAL ON/OFF Dual Set Point Switch

CIRCUIT INPUTS
FKA1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Feedback
FKA2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Feedback
FKA3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Feedback
FKA4 ON/OFF Compressor A4 Feedback
FKB1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Feedback
FKB2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Feedback
FKB3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Feedback
FKB4 ON/OFF Compressor B4 Feedback

4-20 MA INPUTS

DMND xx.x 4-20 ma Demand Signal

RSET xx.x 4-20 ma Reset Signal

CSP xx.x 4-20 ma Cooling Set Point

77

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

GENERAL OUTPUTS
FAN1 ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay
FAN2 ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay
FAN3 ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay
FAN4 ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay
FAN5 ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay

GEN.O

A.EXV

B.EXV

CIR.A

CIR.B

FAN6 ON/OFF Fan 6 Relay

V.HPA ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit A

V.HPB ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit B
C.WP1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 1
C.WP2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 2

CLHT ON/OFF Cooler/Pump Heater

MLV.R ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV
EXV.A ON/OFF EXV % Open
APPR ON/OFF Circuit A Approach
AP.SP ON/OFF Approach Setpoint

X.SH.R SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig
S.SH.R Digload to Start SH RST

SH_R Amount of SH Reset

OVR.A ON/OFF EXVA Override
SPH.A ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp
ASH.S ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt
AMP.S ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt
PLM.A ON/OFF Cir A EXV Position Limit

SPR.1 ON/OFF Spare 1 Temperature

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV
EXV.B ON/OFF EXV % Open
APPR ON/OFF Circuit B Approach
AP.SP ON/OFF Approach Setpoint

OVR.B ON/OFF EXVB Override
SPH.B ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp
ASH.S ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt
AMP.S ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt
PLM.B ON/OFF Cir B EXV Position Limit

SPR.2 ON/OFF Spare 2 Temperature

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
CC.A1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay
DPE.R ON/OFF Comp A1 Load Percent
CC.A2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay
CC.A3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Relay
CC.A4 ON/OFF Compressor A4 Relay

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B
CC.B1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay
CC.B2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay
CC.B3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Relay
CC.B4 ON/OFF Compressor B4 Relay

78

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs

METR ON/OFF Metric Display Off = English On = Metric

Default: 0

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

LANG X Language Selection

PAS.E ENBL/DSBL Password Enable

PASS XXXX Service Password

UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE Unit Size
SZA.1 XX Compressor A1 Size
SZA.2 XX Compressor A2 Size
SZA.3 XX Compressor A3 Size
SZA.4 XX Compressor A4 Size
SZB.1 XX Compressor B1 Size
SZB.2 XX Compressor B2 Size
SZB.3 XX Compressor B3 Size
SZB.4 XX Compressor B4 Size

SH.SP XX Suction Superheat Setpt

FAN.S X Number of Fans Default: 5

EXV YES/NO EXV Module Installed

A1.TY YES/NO Compressor A1 Digital Default: No

MAX.T XX Maximum A1 Unload Time

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

FLUD X Cooler Fluid Default: Water

2 = Medium Temperature Brine

MLV.S YES/NO Minimum Load Valve Select

CSB.E ENBL/DSBL Csb Boards Enable Default: Enable

CPC ON/OFF Cooler Pump Control Default: Off
PM1E YES/NO Cooler Pump 1 Enable
PM2E YES/NO Cooler Pump 2 Enable

PM.P.S YES/NO Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt Default: No

PM.SL X Cooler Pump Select Default: Automatic

PM.DY XX MIN Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1 min.
PM.DT XXXX HRS Pump Changeover Hours Default: 500 hours

ROT.P YES/NO Rotate Cooler Pumps Now User Entry

EMM YES/NO EMM Module Installed
CND.T X Cnd HX Typ:0=RTPF 1=MCHX
MOPS XX EXV MOP Set Point

APPR XX Config Approach Set Point

0 = English
1 = Espanol
2 = Francais

3 = Portuguese

Default: 7

Max = 12 (010,015)

Max = 10 (018-060)

1 = Water

0 = Automatic
1 = Pump 1 Starts first
2 = Pump 2 Starts first

79

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

Default: 0

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN Control

Default: 1
1 = Equal

2 = Staged

Default: 1

1 = Automatic
2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads

Default: 60

Range: 2 to 60 F

Default: 0 Minutes

Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

0 = Mode Disable

1 = Fan Noise Only

Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

Default: 3

1 = 2400
2 = 4800

3 = 9600
4 =19,200
5 =38,400

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

OPT2

CCN

HP.A

HP.B

CTRL X Control Method

LOAD X Loading Sequence Select

LLCS X Lead/Lag Circuit Select

LCWT XX High LCW Alert Limit

DELY XX Minutes Off Time

ICE.M ENBL/DSBL Ice Mode Enable Default: Disable

LS.MD X Low Sound Mode Select Default: 0

LS.ST 00:00 Low Sound Start Time Default: 00:00

LS.ND 00:00 Low Sound End Time Default: 00:00

LS.LT XXX % Low Sound Capacity Limit

CCN NETWORK CONFIGS

CCNA XXX CCN Address

CCNB XXX CCN Bus Number

BAUD X CCN Baud Rate

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

A1.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp A1

A2.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp A2

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

B1.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp B1

B2.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp B2

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch

2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

80

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

Default: 50

0 to 100

Default: 8

0 to 100

Default: 200

0 to 65535

Default: 0

0 to 100

Default: 0

0 to 65535

Default: 167

0 to 65535

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

Default: 115

50 to 140

Default: 10

0 to 30

Default: 5

0 to 30

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 50

0 to 100

Default: 8

0 to 100

Default: 200

0 to 65535

Default: 0

0 to 100

Default: 0

0 to 65535

Default: 167

0 to 65535

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

EXV.A

EXV.B

STR.A XXX EXV CIrc.A Start Pos

MIN.A XXX EXV Circ.A Min Position

RNG.A XXXXX EXVA Steps In Range 0 to 65535

SPD.A XXXXX EXVA STeps Per Second

POF.A XXX EXVA Fail Position In %

MIN.A XXXXX EXVA Minimum Steps

MAX.A XXXXX EXVA Maximum Steps 0 to 65535

OVR.A XXX EXVA Overrun Steps

TYP.A 0,1 EXVA Stepper Type

H.SCT XXX High SCT Threshold

X.PCT XX Open EXV X% On 2nd Comp

X.PER XX Move EXV X% On DISCRSOL

A.PCT XXX Pre-open EXV - Fan Adding

M.PCT XXX Pre-close EXV - Fan Sub

S.PCT XXX Pre-close EXV - Lag Shut

DELY XXX Lag Start Delay

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.B XXX EXV CIrc.B Start Pos

MIN.B XXX EXV Circ.B Min Position

RNG.B XXXXX EXVB Steps In Range 0 to 65535

SPD.B XXXXX EXVB STeps Per Second

POF.B XXX EXVB Fail Position In %

MIN.B XXXXX EXVB Minimum Steps

MAX.B XXXXX EXVB Maximum Steps 0 to 65535

OVR.B XXX EXVB Overrun Steps

TYP.B 0,1 EXVB Stepper Type

81

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

MOTORMASTER

MMR.S YES/NO Motormaster Select Default: NO

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

Default: 0.1

Range: -20 to 20

Default: 0.0

Range: -20 to 20

Default: 0

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

Default: 125 F

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0 F

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

Default: 10.0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

Default: 0
0 = None

1 = Switch

2 - 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

Default: 60 minutes

Range: 0 to 120 minutes

Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 2

Range: 0 to 239

Default: Master Leads

0 = Master Leads

1 = Slave Leads

2 = Automatic

Default: 168 hours

Range: 40 to 400 hours

Default: 5 minutes

Range: 0 to 30 minutes

CHANGED)

MM

RSET

P.GAN XX Head Pressure P Gain

I.GAN XX.X Head Pressure I Gain

D.GAN XX.X Head Pressure D Gain

MIN.S XX Minimum Fan Speed Default: 5

RESET COOL TEMP

CRST X Cooling Reset Type

MA.DG XX.XΔF 4-20 - Degrees Reset

RM.NO XXX.X °F Remote - No Reset Temp

RM.F XXX.X °F Remote - Full Reset Temp

RM.DG XX.X °F Remote - Degrees Reset

RT.NO XXX.XΔF Return - No Reset Temp

RT.F XXX.XΔF Return - Full Reset Temp

RT.DG XX.X °F Return - Degrees Reset

DMDC X Demand Limit Select

DM20 XXX% Demand Limit at 20 mA

SHNM XXX Loadshed Group Number

SHDL XXX% Loadshed Demand Delta

SHTM XXX Maximum Loadshed Time

DLS1 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 1

DLS2 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 2

LLEN ENBL/DSBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Default: Disable

MSSL SLVE/MAST Master/Slave Select Default: Master

SLVA XXX Slave Address

LLBL X Lead/Lag Balance Select

LLBD XXX Lead/Lag Balance Delta

LLDY XXX Lag Start Delay

PARA YES Parallel Configuration

2 = Outdoor Air Temperature

Default: YES (CANNOT BE

82

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

Default: Single

0 = Single

1 = Dual Switch

2 = Dual CCN Occupied

3 = 4 to 20 mA

Input (requires EMM)

Default: 1.0

Range: 0.3 to 2

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 99

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

SLCT

SERV

BCST

CLSP X Cooling Set Point Select

RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select Default: Enable

CRMP ENBL/DSBL Cooling Ramp Loading

SCHD XX Schedule Number

Z.GN X.X Deadband Multiplier

SERVICE CONFIGURATION
EN.A1 YES/NO Enable Compressor A1
EN.A2 YES/NO Enable Compressor A2
EN.B1 YES/NO Enable Compressor B1
EN.B2 YES/NO Enable Compressor B2

BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

T.D.B ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast

OAT.B ON/OFF CCN OAT Broadcast

G.S.BC ON/OFF Global Schedule Broadcst

BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er

83

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

TIME

DATE

DST

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HD.01

HD.02

HD.03

HD.04

HD.05

HD.06

HD.07

HD.08

HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR

MNTH XX Month of Year

DOM XX Day of Month Range: 01 -31

DAY X Day of Week

YEAR XXXX Year of Century

STR.M XX Month Default: 4 Range 1- 12

STR.W X Week Default: 1 Range 1- 5

STR.D X Day Default: 7 Range 1- 7

MIN.A XX Minutes to Add Default: 60 Range 0 - 99
STP.M XX Month Default: 10 Range 1- 12

STP.W XX Week Default: 5 Range 1- 5

STP.D XX Day Default: 7 Range 1- 7
MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

TIME OF DAY

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 7 (1 = Sunday,

2 = Monday, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

84

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09

HD.09

HD.10

HD.11

HD.12

HD.13

HD.14

HD.15

HD.16

HD.17

HD.18

HD.19

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

85

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20

HD.20

HD.21

HD.22

HD.23

HD.24

HD.25

HD.26

HD.27

HD.28

HD.29

HD.30

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day 01-31
LEN XX Duration (days)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

86

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

SCH.N Schedule Number 0
SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1
OCC.1 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.1 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.1 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

PER.1

PER.2

PER.3

PER.4

PER.5

WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.1 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.1 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2
OCC.2 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.2 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.2 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.2 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.2 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3
OCC.3 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.3 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.3 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.3 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.3 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.3 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.3 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.3 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.3 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.3 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4
OCC.4 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.4 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.4 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.4 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.4 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.4 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.4 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.4 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.4 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.4 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5
OCC.5 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.5 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.5 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.5 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.5 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.5 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.5 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.5 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.5 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.5 YES/NO Holiday In Period

87

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6
OCC.6 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.6 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.6 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.6 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

PER.6

PER.7

PER.8

OVR

WED.6 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.6 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.6 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.6 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.6 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.6 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7
OCC.7 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.7 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.7 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.7 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.7 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.7 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.7 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.7 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.7 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.7 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8
OCC.8 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)
UNC.8 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.8 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.8 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.8 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.8 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.8 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.8 YES/NO Saturday In Period
SUN.8 YES/NO Sunday In Period
HOL.8 YES/NO Holiday In Period

SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

OVR.T X Timed Override Hours Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours

OVR.L X Override Time Limit Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours
T.OVR YES/NO Timed Override User Entry

88

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

MODES CONTROLLING UNIT
MD01 ON/OFF CSM Controlling Chiller
MD02 ON/OFF WSM Controlling Chiller
MD03 ON/OFF Master/Slave Control
MD05 ON/OFF Ramp Load Limited
MD06 ON/OFF Timed Override in effect
MD07 ON/OFF Low Cooler Suction TempA
MD08 ON/OFF Low Cooler Suction TempB
MD09 ON/OFF Slow Change Override
MD10 ON/OFF Minimum OFF time active
MD13 ON/OFF Dual Set Point

MODE

MD14 ON/OFF Temperature Reset
MD15 ON/OFF Demand Limited
MD16 ON/OFF Cooler Freeze Protection
MD17 ON/OFF Low Temperature Cooling
MD18 ON/OFF High Temperature Cooling
MD19 ON/OFF Making Ice
MD20 ON/OFF Storing Ice
MD21 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit A
MD22 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit B
MD23 ON/OFF Minimum Comp. On Time
MD24 ON/OFF Pump Off Delay Time
MD25 ON/OFF Low Sound Mode

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

CRNT

RCRN YES/NO Reset All Current Alarms

HIST

AXXX
TXXX
PXXX

AXXX
TXXX
PXXX

Current Alarms 1-25

ALARM HISTORY

Alarm History 1-20

Alarms are hown as AXXX
Alerts are shown as TXXX

Alarms are shown as AXXX

Alerts are shown as TXXX

89

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

Control Mode 0 = Test

Occupied No/Yes OCC N
CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S Y
Low Sound Active No/Yes LSACTIVE N
Alarm State Normal/Aler t/Alarm ALM N
Active Demand Limit 0 to 100 % DEM_LIM Y
Override Modes in Effect No/Yes MODE N
Percent Total Capacity 0 to 100 % CAP_T N
Requested Stage 0 to 99 STAGE N
Active Set Point –20 to 70 FSP N
Control Point –20 to 70 F CTRL_PNT Y
Entering Fluid Temp snnn.n FEWT N
Leaving Fluid Temp snnn.n FLWT N
Emergency Stop Enable/Emstop Enable EMSTOP Y
Minutes Left for Start 00:00 to 15:00 minutes MIN_LEFT N
PUMPS
Cooler Pump Relay 1 Off/On COOLPMP1 N
Cooler Pump Relay 2 Off/On COOLPMP2 N
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Open/Close PMP1_FBK N
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Open/Close PMP2_FBK N
Cooler Flow Switch Open/Close COOLFLOW N
Lead Pump LEADPUMP Y
Rotate Cooler Pumps Now No/Yes ROT_PUMP Y

1 = Local Off
2 = CCN Off
3 = Clock Off
4 = Emergency Stop
5 = Local On
6 = CCN On
7 = Clock On
8 = Heat Enabled
9 = Pump Delay

STAT N

Heat/Cool Select Heat/Cool HC_SEL N

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPA_T N
Percent Available Cap. 0-100 % CAPA_A N
Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSIG DP_A N
Suction Pressure nnn.n PSIG SP_A N
Head Setpoint nnn.n °F HSP N
Saturated Condensing Tmp snnn.n FTMP_SCTAN
Saturated Suction Temp snnn.n F TMP_SSTA N
EXV % Open nnn % EXV_A N
Var Head Press Output nnn.n milliamps VHP_ACT N
Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTAN
Discharge Gas Temp nnn.n °F DISGAS N
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n FSH_AN
Spare 1 Temperature nnn.n °F SPR1_TMP N

90

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor A1 Relay On/Off K_A1_RLY N
Compressor A2 Relay On/Off K_A2_RLY N
Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY N

CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor A1 Feedback On/Off K_A1_FBK N
Compressor A2 Feedback On/Off K_A2_FBK N

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES
Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPB_T N
Percent Available Cap. 0-100 % CAPB_A N
Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSIG DP_B N
Suction Pressure nnn.n PSIG SP_B N
Head Setpoint nnn.n °F HSP N
Saturated Condensing Tmp snnn.n FTMP_SCTBN
Saturated Suction Temp snnn.n F TMP_SSTB N
EXV % Open nnn % EXV_B N
Var Head Press Output nnn.n milliamps VHP_ACT N
Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTBN
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n FSH_BN
Spare 2 Temperature nnn.n °F SPR2_TMP N

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Compressor B1 Relay On/Off K_B1_RLY N
Compressor B2 Relay On/Off K_B2_RLY N
Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY N

CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS
Compressor B1 Feedback On/Off K_B1_FBK N
Compressor B2 Feedback On/Off K_B2_FBK N

91

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

FAN S
Fan 1 Relay Off/On FAN_1 N
Fan 2 Relay Off/On FAN_2 N
Cooler/Pump Heater Off/On COOL_HTR N

UNIT ANALOG VALUES
Cooler Entering Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_EWTN
Cooler Leaving Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_LWTN
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid snnn.n F DUAL_LWT N

TEMPERATURE RESET
4-20 mA Reset Signal nn.n mA RST_MA N
Outside Air Temperature snnn.n FOAT Y
Space Temperature snnn.n F SPT Y

DEMAND LIMIT
4-20 mA Demand Signal nn.n mA LMT_MA N
Demand Limit Switch 1 Off/On DMD_SW1 N
Demand Limit Switch 2 Off/On DMD_SW2 N
CCN Loadshed Signal 0 = Normal

1 = Redline
2 = Loadshed

DL_STAT N

MISCELLANEOUS
Heat Request Off/On HEAT_REQ N
Dual Setpoint Switch Off/On DUAL_IN N
Cooler LWT Setpoint snnn.n FLWT_SPN
Ice Done Off/On ICE_DONE N

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — UNIT (Unit Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Unit Size nnn tons SIZE
Compressor A1 Size nnn tons SIZE_A1
Compressor A2 Size nnn tons SIZE_A2
Compressor B1 Size nnn tons SIZE_B1
Compressor B2 Size nnn tons SIZE_B2
Suction Superheat Setpt nn.n 9.0 FSH_SP
Number of Fans n FAN_TYPE
Compressor A1 Digital? No/Yes No CPA1TYPE
Maximum A1 Unload Time nn 12 sec MAXULTME

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Cooler Fluid 1 = Water

Minimum Load Vlv Select No/Yes No MLV_FLG
CSB Board Enable Dsable/Enable Enable CSB_ENA
Cooler Pump Control Off/On Off CPC
Cooler Pump 1 Enable No/Yes No PMP1_ENA
Cooler Pump 2 Enable No/Yes No PMP2_ENA
Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt No/Yes No PUMP_PST
Cooler Pump Select 0 = Automatic, 1 =

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 1 minutes PUMP_DLY
Pump Changeover Hours 10 to 2000 100 hours PMP_DLTA
EMM Module Installed No/Yes No EMM_BRD
Cnd HX Typ: 0=RTPF 1=MCHX 0/1 1 COILTYPE
EXV MOP Set Point nn.n °F MOP_SP
Config Approach Setpoint nn.n °F IAPPROSP

2 = Med. Brine

Pump 1, 2 = Pump 2

1FLUIDTYP

0 PMP_SLCT

92

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Control Method 0 = Switch

Loading Sequence Select 1 = Equal Loading

Lead/Lag Circuit Select 1 = Automatic

Cooling Setpoint Select 0 = Single

Ramp Load Select Enable/Dsable Enable RAMP_EBL
Heat Cool Select Cool/Heat Cool HEATCOOL
High LCW Alert Limit 2 to 60 60.0 F LCW_LMT
Minutes off time 0 to 15 0 min DELAY
Deadband Multiplier 1.0 to 4.0 1.0 Z_GAIN
Ice Mode Enable Enable/Dsable Dsable ICE_CNFG
Low Sound Mode Select 0 = Disabled

Low Sound Start Time 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 LS_START
Low Sound End Time 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 LS_END
Low Sound Capacity Limit 0 to 100 100 % LS_LIMIT

2 = Occupancy
3 = CCN

2 = Staged Loading

2 = Circuit A Leads
3 = Circuit B Leads

1 = Dual, remote switch controlled
2 = Dual CCN occupancy
3 = 4-20 mA input

1 = Fan only
2 = Capacity/Fans

0 CONTROL

1 SEQ_TYP

1 LEAD_TYP

0 CLSP_TYP

0LS_MODE

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Schedule Number 0 to 99 1 SCHEDNUM
Override Time Limit 0 to 4 0 hours OTL
Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 0 hours OVR_EXT
Timed Override No/Yes No TIMEOVER

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

COOLING RESET
Cooling Reset Type 0 = No Reset

4-20 MA RESET
4-20 – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 F 420_DEG

REMOTE RESET
Remote – No Reset Temp 0 to 125 125.0 FREM_NO
Remote – Full Reset Temp 0 to 125 0.0 FREM_FULL
Remote – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 F REM_DEG

RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET
Return – No Reset Temp 0 to 125 10.0 FRTN_NO
Return – Full Reset Temp 0 to 125 0.0 FRTN_FULL
Return – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 FRTN_DEG

1 = 4-20 mA input
2 = External temp – OAT
3 = Return Fluid
4 = External temp - SPT

0CRST_TYP

DEMAND LIMIT
Demand Limit Select 0 = None

Demand Limit at 20 mA 0 to 100 100 % DMT20MA
Loadshed Group Number 0 to 99 0 SHED_NUM
Loadshed Demand Delta 0 to 60 0 % SHED_DEL
Maximum Loadshed Time 0 to 120 60 minutes SHED_TIM
Demand Limit Switch 1 0 to 100 80 % DLSWSP1
Demand Limit Switch 2 0 to 100 50 % DLSWSP2

1 = External switch input
2 = 4-20 mA input
3 = Loadshed

0DMD_CTRL

93

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

LEAD/LAG
Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Enable/Dsable Dsable LL_ENA
Master/Slave Select Master/Slave Master MS_SEL
Slave Address 0 to 239 2 SLV_ADDR
Lead/Lag Balance Select 0 = None 0 LL_BAL
Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 168 hours LL_BAL_D
Lag Start Delay 0 to 30 5 minutes LL_DELAY
Parallel Configuration Yes Yes PARALLEL

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Service Password nnnn 1111 PASSWORD
Password Enable Enable/Disable Enable PASS_EBL
Metric Display Off/On Off DISPUNIT
Language Selection 0 = ENGLISH

1 = FRANCAIS
2 = ESPANOL
3 = PORTUGUES

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVACONF (EXV Circuit A Configuration)

0LANGUAGE

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV Circ. A Start Pos nnn.n 50.0 % EXVASTRT
EXV Circ. A Min Position nnn.n 8.0 % EXVAMINP
EXVA Steps in Range nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EVXARANG
EXVA Steps Per Second nnnnn 200 steps EXVARATE
EXVA Fail Position in % nnnn.nn 0 % EXVAPOSF
EXVA Minimum Steps nnnnn 0 steps EXVAMINS
EXVA Maximum Steps nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EXVAMAXS
EXVA Overrun Steps nnnnn 167 steps EXVAOVRS
EXVA Stepper Type nnn Bipolar EXVATYPE
High SCT Threshold nnn.n 115 °F HIGH_SCT
Open EXV X% on 2nd Comp nnn.n 10 % EXV_HSCT
Open EXV X% on DISCRSOL nnn.n 5 % EXVDISCR
Pre-Open EXV - Fan Adding nnn.n 10 % EXV_AFAN
Pre-Close EXV - Fan Sub nnn.n 10 % EXV_MFAN
Pre-Close EXV - Lag Shut nnn.n 10 % EXV_SLAG
Lag Start Delay nnn 10 secs DELAYLAG

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVBCONF (EXV Circuit B Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV Circ. B Start Pos nnn.n 50.0 % EXVBSTRT
EXV Circ. B Min Position nnn.n 8.0 % EXVBMINP
EXVB Steps in Range nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EVXBRANG
EXVB Steps Per Second nnnnn 200 steps EXVBRATE
EXVB Fail Position in % nnnn.nn 0 % EXVBPOSF
EXVB Minimum Steps nnnnn 0 steps EXVBMINS
EXVB Maximum Steps nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EXVBMAXS
EXVB Overrun Steps nnnnn 167 steps EXVBOVRS
EXVB Stepper Type nnn Bipolar EXVBTYPE

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — MM_CONF (Motormaster Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Motormaster Select No/Yes No MM_SLCT
Head Pressure P Gain nnn.n 1.0 HP_PGAIN
Head Pressure I Gain nnn.n 0.1 HP_IGAIN
Head Pressure D Gain nnn.n 0.0 HP_DGAIN
Minimum Fan Speed nnn.n 5.0 % MIN_VHP

94

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN SERVICE TABLES — SERVICE

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

SERVICE
Brine Freeze Point nnn.n F BRN_FRZ
Pump Service Interval nnnnn hours SI_PUMPS
COMPRESSOR ENABLE
Enable Compressor A1 Disable/Enable ENABLEA1
Enable Compressor A2 Disable/Enable ENABLEA2
Enable Compressor B1 Disable/Enable ENABLEB1
Enable Compressor B2 Disable/Enable ENABLEB2

CCN SETPOINT TABLES — SETPOINT

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

COOLING
Cooling Setpoint 1 –20 to 70 44.0 FCSP1
Cooling Setpoint 2 –20 to 70 44.0 FCSP2
ICE Setpoint –20 to 32 32.0 FCSP3

RAMP LOADING
Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2 to 2.0 1.0 CRAMP

Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34 34.0 F BRN_FRZ
Head Setpoint FHSP
Fan On Set Point F FANONSP
Fan Off Set Point FFANOFFSP
Fan Stage Delta FFSTGDLTA
Base Fan Off Delta Temp FB_FANOFF

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRA_EXV

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_A
Circuit A Approach nnn.n delta F CIRA_APP
Approach Setpoint nnn.n delta F APPRA_SP
EXVA Override nnnnn EXVAOVRR
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n delta F SH_A
Active Superheat Setpt nn.n delta F ACTSH_SP
Active MOP Setpt nn.n delta F ACMOP_SP
Cir A EXV Position Limit nnn % PLMA

95

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRB_EXV

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_B
Circuit B Approach nnn.n delta F CIRB_APP
Approach Setpoint nnn.n delta F APPRB_SP
EXVB Override nnnnn EXVBOVRR
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n delta F SH_B
Active Superheat Setpt nn.n delta F ACTSH_SP
Active MOP Setpt nn.n delta F ACMOP_SP
Cir B EXV Position Limit nnn % PLMB

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — STRTHOUR

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Machine Operating Hours nnnnnn hours HR_MACH
Machine Starts nnnnnn CY_MACH

Circuit A Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_CIRA

Compressor A1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_A1
Compressor A2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_A2

Circuit B Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_CIRB

Compressor B1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_B1
Compressor B2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_B2

Circuit A Starts nnnnnn CY_CIRA

Compressor A1 Starts nnnnnn CY_A1
Compressor A2 Starts nnnnnn CY_A2

Circuit B Starts nnnnnn CY_CIRB

Compressor B1 Starts nnnnnn CY_B1
Compressor B2 Starts nnnnnn CY_B2

PUMP HOURS
Pump 1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_PUMP1
Pump 2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_PUMP2

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CURRMODS

DESCRIPTION VALUE POINT NAME

CSM controlling Chiller On/Off MODE_1
WSM controlling Chiller On/Off MODE_2
Master/Slave control On/Off MODE_3
Ramp Load Limited On/Off MODE_5
Timed Override in effect On/Off MODE_6
Low Cooler Suction TempA On/Off MODE_7
Low Cooler Suction TempB On/Off MODE_8
Slow Change Override On/Off MODE_9
Minimum OFF time active On/Off MODE_10
Dual Setpoint On/Off MODE_13
Temperature Reset On/Off MODE_14
Demand/Sound Limited On/Off MODE_15
Cooler Freeze Protection On/Off MODE_16
Low Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_17
High Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_18
Making ICE On/Off MODE_19
Storing ICE On/Off MODE_20
High SCT Circuit A On/Off MODE_21
High SCT Circuit B On/Off MODE_22
Minimum Comp. On Time On/Off MODE_23
Pump Off Delay Time On/Off MODE_24
Low Sound Mode On/Off MODE_25

96

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — ALARMS

DESCRIPTION VALUE POINT NAME

Active Alarm #1 Axxx or Txxx ALARM01C
Active Alarm #2 Axxx or Txxx ALARM02C
Active Alarm #3 Axxx or Txxx ALARM03C
Active Alarm #4 Axxx or Txxx ALARM04C
Active Alarm #5 Axxx or Txxx ALARM05C
Active Alarm #6 Axxx or Txxx ALARM06C
Active Alarm #7 Axxx or Txxx ALARM07C
Active Alarm #8 Axxx or Txxx ALARM08C
Active Alarm #9 Axxx or Txxx ALARM09C
Active Alarm #10 Axxx or Txxx ALARM10C
Active Alarm #11 Axxx or Txxx ALARM11C
Active Alarm #12 Axxx or Txxx ALARM12C
Active Alarm #13 Axxx or Txxx ALARM13C
Active Alarm #14 Axxx or Txxx ALARM14C
Active Alarm #15 Axxx or Txxx ALARM15C
Active Alarm #16 Axxx or Txxx ALARM16C
Active Alarm #17 Axxx or Txxx ALARM17C
Active Alarm #18 Axxx or Txxx ALARM18C
Active Alarm #19 Axxx or Txxx ALARM19C
Active Alarm #20 Axxx or Txxx ALARM20C
Active Alarm #21 Axxx or Txxx ALARM21C
Active Alarm #22 Axxx or Txxx ALARM22C
Active Alarm #23 Axxx or Txxx ALARM23C
Active Alarm #24 Axxx or Txxx ALARM24C
Active Alarm #25 Axxx or Txxx ALARM25C

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — VERSIONS

DESCRIPTION VERSION VALUE

EXV CESR131172- nn-nn
AUX CESR131333- nn-nn
MBB CESR131460- nn-nn
EMM CESR131174- nn-nn
MARQUEE CESR131171- nn-nn
NAVIGATOR CESR130227- nn-nn

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — LOADFACT

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

CAPACITY CONTROL
Load/Unload Factor snnn.n SMZ
Control Point snnn.n F CTRL_PNT
Entering Fluid Temp snnn.n FEWT
Leaving Fluid Temp snnn.n FLWT

Ramp Load Limited On/Off MODE_5
Slow Change Override On/Off MODE_9
Cooler Freeze Protection On/Off MODE_16
Low Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_17
High Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_18
Minimum Comp. On Time On/Off MODE_23

97

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-PUMP

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Pump Service Interval nnnnnn hours SI_PUMPS
Pump 1 Service Countdown nnnnnn hours P1_CDOWN
Pump 1 Maintenance Done Yes/No P1_MAINT
Pump 2 Service Countdown nnnnnn hours P2_CDOWN
Pump 2 Maintenance Done Yes/No P2_MAINT
Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM0
Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM1
Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM2
Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM3
Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM4
Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM0
Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM1
Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM2
Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM3
Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-STRN

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Strainer Srvc Interval nnnnnn hours SI_STRNR
Strainer Srvc Countdown nnnnnn hours ST_CDOWN
Strainer Maint. Done Yes/No ST_MAINT
Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM0
Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM1
Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM2
Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM3
Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-COIL

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter nnnnnn hours SI_COIL
Coil Service Countdown nnnnnn hours CL_CDOWN
Coil Cleaning Maint.Done Yes/No CL_MAINT
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM0
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM1
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM2
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM3
Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM4

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — TESTMODE

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Service Test Mode On/Off NET_CTRL
Compressor A1 Relay On/Off S_A1_RLY
Compressor A2 Relay On/Off S_A2_RLY
Compressor B1 Relay On/Off S_B1_RLY
Compressor B2 Relay On/Off S_B2_RLY
Fan 1 Relay On/Off S_FAN_1
Fan 2 Relay On/Off S_FAN_2
Cooler Pump Relay 1 On/Off S_CLPMP1
Cooler Pump Relay 2 On/Off S_CLPMP2
Comp A1 Unload Time nn sec S_A1ULTM
Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off S_MLV
Remote Alarm Relay On/Off S_ALM
EXV % Open nn % S_EXV_A
EXV % Open nn % S_EXV_B

98

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — RUNTEST

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAPA_T
Percent Available Cap. nnn % CAPA_A
Discharge Pressure nnn.n psig DP_A
Suction Pressure nnn.n psig SP_A
Head Setpoint nnn.n FHSP
Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n FTMP_SCTA
Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n FTMP_SSTA
Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTA
Discharge Gas Temp nnn.n FDISGAS
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_A
Compressor A1 Relay On/Off K_A1_RLY
Compressor A2 Relay On/Off K_A2_RLY
Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY
Compressor A1 Feedback On/Off K_A1_FBK
Compressor A2 Feedback On/Off K_A2_FBK
Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAPB_T
Percent Available Cap. nnn % CAPB_A
Discharge Pressure nnn.n psig DP_B
Suction Pressure nnn.n psig SP_B
Head Setpoint nnn.n FHSP
Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n FTMP_SCTB
Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n FTMP_SSTB
Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTB
Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_B
Compressor B1 Relay On/Off K_B1_RLY
Compressor B2 Relay On/Off K_B2_RLY
Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY

Compressor B1 Feedback On/Off K_B1_FBK
Compressor B2 Feedback On/Off K_B2_FBK
Fan 1 Relay On/Off FAN_1
Fan 2 Relay On/Off FAN_2

Outside Air Temperature nnn.n FOAT
Space Temperature nnn.n F SPT
Cooler Pump Relay 1 On/Off COOLPMP1
Cooler Pump Relay 2 On/Off COOLPMP2
Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Open/Closed PMP1_FBK
Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Open/Closed PMP2_FBK
Cooler Entering Fluid nnn.n F COOL_EWT
Cooler Leaving Fluid nnn.n F COOL_LWT
Compressor A1 Size nnn tons SIZE_A1
Compressor A2 Size nnn tons SIZE_A2
Compressor B1 Size nnn tons SIZE_B1
Compressor B2 Size nnn tons SIZE_B2
Cooler Flow Switch On/Off COOLFLOW

99

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — DUALCHIL

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Dual Chiller Link Good? Yes/No DC_LINK
Master Chiller Role Stand Alone,

Slave Chiller Role Stand Alone,

Lead Chiller Ctrl Point snnn.n F LEAD_CP
Lag Chiller Ctrl Point snnn.n FLAG_CP
Control Point snnn.n F CTRL_PNT

Cool EnteringFluid-Slave snnn.n FCOOLEWTS
Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave snnn.n FCOOLLWTS
Cooler Entering Fluid snnn.n F COOL_EWT
Cooler Leaving Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_LWT
Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid snnn.n F DUAL_LWT

Percent Avail.Capacity 0-100 % CAP_A
Percent Avail.Cap.Slave 0-100 % CAP_A_S

Lag Start Delay Time hh:mm LAGDELAY
Load/Unload Factor snnn.n SMZ
Load/Unload Factor-Slave snnn.n SMZSLAVE
Lead SMZ Clear Commanded Yes/No LEADSMZC
Lag SMZ Clear Commanded Yes/No LAG_SMZC
Lag Commanded Off? Yes/No LAG_OFF

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

MC_ROLE

SC_ROLE

Dual Chill Lead CapLimit 0-100 % DCLDCAPL
Dual Chill Lag CapLimit 0-100 % DCLGCAPL

100